Volume 4, Issue 8(1), August 2015
International Journal of Multidisciplinary Educational Research
Published by Sucharitha Publications 8-21-4,Saraswathi Nivas,Chinna Waltair Visakhapatnam – 530 017 Andhra Pradesh – India Email:
[email protected] Website: www.ijmer.in
Editorial Board Editor-in-Chief Dr.K. Victor Babu Faculty, Department of Philosophy Andhra University – Visakhapatnam - 530 003 Andhra Pradesh – India
EDITORIAL BOARD MEMBERS Prof. S.Mahendra Dev
Prof. Fidel Gutierrez Vivanco
Vice Chancellor Indira Gandhi Institute of Development Research Mumbai
Founder and President Escuela Virtual de Asesoría Filosófica Lima Peru
Prof.Y.C. Simhadri Vice Chancellor, Patna University Former Director Institute of Constitutional and Parliamentary Studies, New Delhi & Formerly Vice Chancellor of Benaras Hindu University, Andhra University Nagarjuna University, Patna University
Prof. (Dr.) Sohan Raj Tater Former Vice Chancellor Singhania University, Rajasthan
Prof.K.Sreerama Murty Department of Economics Andhra University - Visakhapatnam
Prof. K.R.Rajani Department of Philosophy Andhra University – Visakhapatnam
Prof. P.D.Satya Paul Department of Anthropology Andhra University – Visakhapatnam
Prof. Josef HÖCHTL Department of Political Economy University of Vienna, Vienna & Ex. Member of the Austrian Parliament Austria
Prof. Alexander Chumakov Chair of Philosophy Russian Philosophical Society Moscow, Russia
Prof. Igor Kondrashin The Member of The Russian Philosophical Society The Russian Humanist Society and Expert of The UNESCO, Moscow, Russia
Dr. Zoran Vujisiæ Rector St. Gregory Nazianzen Orthodox Institute Universidad Rural de Guatemala, GT, U.S.A
Prof.U.Shameem Department of Zoology Andhra University Visakhapatnam
Dr. N.V.S.Suryanarayana Dept. of Education, A.U. Campus Vizianagaram
Dr. Kameswara Sharma YVR Asst. Professor Dept. of Zoology Sri. Venkateswara College, Delhi University, Delhi
I Ketut Donder Depasar State Institute of Hindu Dharma Indonesia
Prof. Roger Wiemers Professor of Education Lipscomb University, Nashville, USA
Dr.B.S.N.Murthy Department of Mechanical Engineering GITAM University –Visakhapatnam
N.Suryanarayana (Dhanam)
Dr.Ton Quang Cuong
Department of Philosophy Andhra University Visakhapatnam
Dean of Faculty of Teacher Education University of Education, VNU, Hanoi
Prof. Chanakya Kumar Department of Computer Science
Dr.S.V Lakshmana Rao Coordinator A.P State Resource Center Visakhapatnam
University of Pune,Pune
Prof. Djordje Branko Vukelic Department for Production Engineering University of Novi Sad, Serbia
Dr.S.Kannan Department of History Annamalai University Annamalai Nagar, Chidambaram
Dr. Barada Prasad Bhol Registrar, Purushottam Institute of Engineering & Technology Sundargarh, Odisha
Dr.E. Ashok Kumar Department of Education North- Eastern Hill University, Shillong
Dr.K.Chaitanya
Prof.Shobha V Huilgol Department of Pharmacology Off- Al- Ameen Medical College, Bijapur
Prof.Joseph R.Jayakar Department of English GITAM University Hyderabad
Prof.Francesco Massoni Department of Public Health Sciences University of Sapienza, Rome
Department of Chemistry Nanjing University of Science and Technology People’s Republic of China
Prof.Mehsin Jabel Atteya
Dr.Merina Islam
Prof. Ronato Sabalza Ballado
Al-Mustansiriyah University College of Education Department of Mathematics, Iraq
Department of Philosophy Cachar College, Assam
Department of Mathematics University of Eastern Philippines, Philippines
Dr. Bipasha Sinha
Dr.Senthur Velmurugan .V Librarian Kalasalingam University Krishnankovil Tamilnadu
S. S. Jalan Girls’ College University of Calcutta, Calcutta Dr. K. John Babu Department of Journalism & Mass Comm Central University of Kashmir, Kashmir
Dr.J.B.Chakravarthi Assistant Professor Department of Sahitya Rasthritya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, Tirupati
® © Editor-in-Chief, IJMER Typeset and Printed in India www.ijmer.in IJMER, Journal of Multidisciplinary Educational Research, concentrates on critical and creative research in multidisciplinary traditions. This journal seeks to promote original research and cultivate a fruitful dialogue between old and new thought.
CONTENTS Volume 4 S. No 1.
Issue 8(1)
August 2015
Impacts of Community Participation in Village Tourism Management: A Comparative Studies in Bali and Yogyakarta, Indonesia I Ketut Putra Suarthana & I Nyoman Madiun
Page No 1
2.
Study of Land use Change on Tourism area Using High Spatial Resolution of Remote Sensing Imagery I Nyoman Sunarta, Made Sudiana Mahendra, A A. Suryawan Wiranatha & Syamsul Alam Paturusi
17
3.
Examining the Online Destination Image of Rural Areas in Bali: Case Study Pemuteran Village Made Sandhi Yuliarsa & Putu Sucita Yanthy
32
4.
The Effect of Service Quality in International Airport I Gusti Ngurah Rai on Satisfaction, Image, Tourists Loyalty Who Visited Bali Saroha Manullang, Komang Gde Bendesa & Nyoman Darma Putra
46
5.
Efforts of NGOs in Development of Sexually Exploited Women in South India Kumudini Achchi
61
6.
Solid Waste Management in Kerala: Problems and Prospects Nithya N.R
78
7.
Effectiveness of E-Learning Modules in Mathematics at the Higher Secondary Level S. Leo Stanly
97
8.
Exit Interviews and the Global Scenario Vasaka Sridevikiran
109
9.
Relationship Between Hotel Companies and Travel Agencies: A Study from the Perspective of Service Intermediaries of Tourism Industry Everil Jacklin Fernandes & M.Amulya
121
10.
Promoting Health Education among Lactating Mother through Social Case Work Intervention G.Malleswaramma
134
11.
The Impact of Learning Management System (LMS) on EFL Student Performance in the Sultanate of Oman Joshi Thomas & K. Pramila
142
12.
Women's Movement: An Overview
153 Jaibheem Dhargi
13.
A Critical Review on Socio-Economic Study of Weavers in Hyderabad Karanatak Sanjeev Kumar G Kudri & Jaikishan Thakur
158
14.
Preliminary Studies on Structural Wood in Urban Systems Syeda Qaseem Fatima, M.Rajashekhar & K.Vijaykumar
176
15.
Status of Women and Role of Organizations in Women Empowerment in India Jaibheem Dhargi
189
16.
Diversity of Termite Fauna in Urban Systems Syeda Qaseem Fatima, M.Rajashekhar & K.Vijaykumar
195
17.
Dual-Redundancy Anti-Skid Braking System with Passage Organization Technique in Aircraft Ganesh Mohanrao Dhonde
201
18.
A Study on Executive Training with Reference to Airport Authority of India (AAI) and Electronic Corporation of India (ECIL) Nagaraju Battu & Ch.Yadagiri
210
19.
Workforce Diversity Dimensions and Its Impact on Pharmaceutical Companies P.Jayasudha & G.Manchala
224
20.
Management of Executive Stress K. John & N Jayalakshmi
241
21.
Babasaheb Dr.B.R.Ambedkar and Institutional Establishment for Social, Political and Economic Rights Surya Raju Mattimalla
255
Dr. K. VICTOR BABU M.A.,M.A.,M.Phil.,Ph.D.,PDF, (D.Lit) Faculty of Philosophy and Religious Studies & Editor-in-Chief International Journal of Multidisciplinary Educational Research (IJMER) & Sucharitha: A Journal of Philosophy and Religion Andhra University, Visakhapatnam Pin - 530 003 , Andhra Pradesh – India
ISSN : 2277 – 7881 Impact Factor :2.972(2015) Index Copernicus Value: 5.16
Editorial…… You will be happy to know that we have entered the fourth year of publication of IJMER, since its inception in April 2012. Focusing on many interdisciplinary subjects, the published papers are spreading the knowledge with fervent hope of upholding the holistic approach. With all my heart, I reiterate to echo my sincere feelings and express my profound thanks to each and every valued contributor. This journal continues to nurture and enhance the capabilities of one and all associated with it. We as a team with relentless efforts are committed to inspire the readers and achieve further progress. Aim is to sustain the tempo and improve. We acknowledge with pleasure that our readers are enjoying the publications of Sucharita Publishers. We solicit to receive ideas and comments for future improvements in its content and quality. Editor – in-Chief explicitly conveys his gratitude to all the Editorial Board members. Your support is our motivation. Best wishes to everyone.
Dr.K.Victor Babu Editor-in-Chief
SOCIAL SCIENCES, HUMANITIES, COMMERCE & MANAGEMENT, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY, MEDICINE, SCIENCES, ART & DEVELOPMENT STUDIES, LAW
www.ijmer.in
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
IMPACTS OF COMMUNITY PARTICIPATION IN VILLAGE TOURISM MANAGEMENT: A COMPARATIVE STUDIES IN BALI AND YOGYAKARTA, INDONESIA
I Ketut Putra Suarthana Doctoral Tourism Program Udayana University Bali, Indonesia
I Nyoman Madiun Doctoral Tourism Program Udayana University Bali, Indonesia
Introduction An increasing number of tourists visit Bali is caused by the various tourism activities which can be done. Natural environmentbased cultural tourism makes the environmentalist tourists in droves to visit the centre of environmental conservation tourism. This is a proof of kind of tourism from mass tourism to quality one. Beach, resort and shopping tour tourism models experience saturation. Stakeholders are required more creative and innovative to pack more challenging tourism such as: village tourism and spiritual tourism. In Bali village tourism and spiritual tourism contribute 30% of the tourism’s income (Prana, 2012). The development of village tourism and rural tourism recently has become Indonesian Government programs in an effort of environmental conservation and poverty reduction in rural areas (Putra and Pitana, 2010). In 2013 the amount of village tourism in Indonesia was 980 village tourism in 32 provinces (Prihatyani, 2011). Yogyakarta is one of the provinces which are also often promoted village tourism. One of the village tourism in this province is Pentingsari village tourism, which successfully won numerous awards, including the award for Indonesian best village tourism in 2013. Characteristics of Pentingsari village tourism have similarities with Bedulu village tourism. www.ijmer.in
1
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
The model of village tourism actually had been carried out for the first time in Tanjung Village Yogyakarta; community-based tourism model gave better economical contributions for local community. Winarno (2004) concluded that the emergence of village tourism is due to changes in the world tourist trends in 1990 which is commonly known ‘back to nature’, many tourists visit the village, stay until revealed village tourism. Nowadays, the development of village tourism in Yogyakarta increased rapidly. In Bali, Mr. Jeffry Kairupan as a Director of Indonesian Bank in Denpasar in 2010 provided aid to village tourism in Bali through CSR(Corporate Social Responsibility) with the purpose of Bali development since care and choosing community tourism (Sulityowati, 2011, Kompas.com).Further Indonesian Bank corporate with Bali Hotel Association chose seven village tourism scattered in Bali exactly in six regencies, they are: Pinge Village (Tabanan), Bedulu Village (Gianyar), Panglipuran Village (Bangli), Blimbingsari Village (Jembrana), Buda Keling and Jasri village(Karangasem) and Pancasari village (Buleleng). Considering positive impact of the village tourism application, hence it is deemed necessary to conduct comparative study from some village tourism, therefore problem of study can be elaborated as follows: 1) How is the comparative degree of community participation in Bedulu and Pentingsari village tourism? 2) How is the comparative degree of community participation towards socio cultural, environmental and economic in Bedulu and Pentingsari village tourism? The purpose of this research was to analyze the comparison degree of community participation and the impact of socio-cultural, environmental and economic occurred in Bedulu and Pentingsari village tourism? Theoretical Review Official Regulation of Cultural Tourism Ministry No. PM.26/UM. 001/MKP/2010 in 2010 defines village tourism is a form of www.ijmer.in
2
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
integration between accommodation attraction and supporting facilities which are presented in the structure of communities’ life joint with the valid etiquette and tradition (Putra and Pitana, 2010). National Community Empowerment Program (NCEP) funding is directed to the construction and development of village tourism in Indonesia, (Putra and Pitana, 2010). Local Community Participation in Community Based Tourism (CBT) Salazar in his writing “The Power Imagination in Transnational Mobilities”(2011) analyzes two village tourism, namely Tembi Village Yogyakarta and Candirejo Village, Magelang, Central Java.The implementation of Tembi and Candirejo village tourism which was originally set as a model of village tourism by Tourism and Cultural Ministry was actually owned and operated by investors from Australia at that time (James, 2003). Due to seeking profit orientation therefore the price set by Tembi village tourism is very expensive, even it cannot be reached by domestic tourists. In addition, local community involvement in the process of planning and implementing activities in Tembi Village is very sketchy (Salazar, 2011: 580).Candirejo village tourism, Putra and Pitana (2010) finds that the role of the community through cooperatives have been felt early. The concept of village tourism in Indonesia evolved from the concept of Community Based Tourism (CBT), where the community is actively being manager and participated in the operations of the tourism objects, instead of just passively being part of tourism attraction (Putra and Pitana, 2010:71). It is the application of the Procommunists Tourism theory in implementing pro-growth, job creation, and pro-poor strategies. Village tourism becomes the expectation pillar not only for removing poverty or raising welfare but
www.ijmer.in
3
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
also developing ideal Indonesian tourism model (Putra and Pitana, 2010:81). It is also important referred here Nepal research (2007) about the experiences of two village tourism in developing village tourism, Breugel ( 2013 ) about community-based tourism in two villages in Thailand and Madiun’s research (2008) about community participation in developing tourism area in his region. Those two earlier research were interesting to be used as a reference because revealing the experience of developing village tourism in Nepal and Thailand, both countries have similarities with the village in Indonesia as Asian’s fellow. Participation Theory Pretty (1995) describes the community participation on seven levels started from manipulative participation, passive participation, functional participation, interactive participation until selfmobilization. Every level allows us to distinguish between levels of external involvement and local control and reflect power relations between them. Community participation model, Pretty (1995) can be formulated in the following table 2.1 . According to Arnstein (1971), citizens’ participation is a redistribution of power which allows the citizen who are not capable of, slowly and fully careful to participate sustainably.Arnstein in this discussion is based on citizens’ typology consists of eight levels, and then divided into three categories. The lowest participation is the manipulative participation (non participation), while the highest participation level is the level of citizens’ power. Butthe middle participation showed degrees of citizen’s tokenism. Tosun (1999) develops a typology of community participation in tourism by classifying types of the community participation into three main components, each component has subdivision. Three main parts www.ijmer.in
4
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
are spontaneous participation, community participation as a result of the violence (coercive participation), and the community participation because the community are encouraged to do it (induced participation). Spontaneous participation according to Tosun model (1999) is similar with the level of citizen’s power in Arnsteins’ model (1971), and also self-mobilization and interactive participation in Prettys’ model (1995).Spontaneous participation interprets the most ideal means to provide managerial responsibilities and power in the community. Participation in tourism because of encouragement as shown in Tosun’s model (1999) is same as the level of community activities in Arnstein model (1971) and equal as functional participation and incentives material participation and also participation through consultation in Pretty’s model (1995). In the most ideal type, that is the participation because the community are encouraged to do it (induced participation), the local community have the opportunity to hear and to be heard their voice. They have a vote in the process of tourism development but their views are not certainly reckoned by the other powers which have interests such as the power from the government, big company, international tour operator and other big powers. The type of this participation mostly found in developing countries, where the local people support a decision about the tourism development which is made for them not from them. This type of participation is top-down, passive and indirect. The local people participate in implementing and obtaining profit from tourism, but they are not involved in the process of making decision. Coercive participation is a form of participation which is manipulated and rigged as a real substitute participation. This participation shows the bottom of Arnstein’s step (1971) namely manipulation and therapy and also the passive and manipulative participation in Pretty’s model (1995). In this type, although the
www.ijmer.in
5
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
development of tourism seems putting the community as a priority, but it is actually more directed to complete the need and desire of decision makers, businessmen and tourists. Community participation in community-based tourism, cultural tourism development is considered as the best way to attract tourists to the destinations therefore it gives impact to the improvement of the quality of life entirely(Cecil, et al., 2010). In line with Addos’ statement (2011), beach, hotels and resorts give economic advantages on certain points primarily on cultural capital destinations. Another interesting thing which is relevant to the development of community-based tourism is to popularize the local food. Food diversities appropriate to the locations, cultures and traditions, both in primary and secondary one give a good prospect and it is a challenge for tourism industry development (Henderson, 2007). In detail the Tosuns’ participation model (2006) can be described in table 1 below. Table 1 Normative Typologies of Community Participation Level 1
Level 2
7. Selfmobilization
8. Citizen Control
6.Interactive Participation
7. Delegated power
5.Functional participation 4.Participation for material incentives
5. Placation
www.ijmer.in
6. Partnership
4. Consultation
Spontaneous participation: bottom up; active and direct participation, participation in decision making, authentic participation, self planning Induced participation: top down, passive, formal, mostly indirect, degree of
6
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Level 3
3. Participation by consultation
3. Informing
1.
2. Therapy
Passive participation
1. Manipulative participation
Level 4Non Participation Pretty’s (1995)typology of community participation
1. Manipulation
Arnstein’s(1971)typology of community participation
tokenism, manipulation, pseudo participation, participation in implementation, sharing benefit, device between proposed alternatives and feedback Coercive participation: top down, passive, mostly indirect, formal, participation in implementation but not necessarily sharing benefits, choice between proposed limited alternatives or no choice, paternalism, non participation, high degree of tokenism and manipulation. Tosun’s (1999)typology of community participation
Source: Tosun (2006). Methodology Research techniques applied in this research was descriptive qualitative which oriented in purposing object of research. In qualitative research, researcher and at once as an instrument of the research. The qualitative analysis method done by assessing phenomena of community participation in the implementation of www.ijmer.in
7
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
village tourism. Deeply interview obtained for 11 informants (main informants) such as manager, customary leader and community agent, in an effort to explore social phenomena primarily about participation or community involvement. During the observation, all information were recorded in the videotape, the role of the community, managers and the government are extracted and explored for further analysis through comparative study in order to compare the participation level and the impact result for the community. Findings and Discussion A General Description of Bedulu and Petingsari Village Tourism Bedulu village is one of the nine existing rural village located in Blahbatuh sub-district Gianyar Bali. This village is the ancient village which has an interesting potential culture. The main potential of this village is cultural heritage (archeology) which is sanctified and stored in the villages’ temples. Other potential of Bedulu village is painting of immemorial famous leaders which are displayed in 22 painting houses combined with youth painting of Bedulu village. In terms of art; sculpture and dance Bedulus’ kecak dance has been known in 1930 with Sugriwa and Subali theme (Astawa, 2011). Pentingsari village located in Umbulharjo district Cangkringan sadistic Seman regency, Yogyakarta. It is situated in closest area of mount Merapi slopes which has previous historical correlations and in the slopes of tourist destination Adem river before Merapi golf course. Pentingsari village is located in cool and fresh area,in the height of 600 meters, 13 km from the center of Yogyakarta. Environmental conditions such as village nature contoured in hill and low-lying areas, between two
rivers like Kuning River and Pawon River which are
upper course in the slopes of mount Merapi. The area of Pentingsari village tourism consists of the settlement, plantation, the forest, www.ijmer.in
8
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
agriculture, Moslem people who have the job as farmers and civil servants. In Pentingsari village there are many a historical relics. These relics have been used as a tourism destination until now; like the offering of Gajah Watu, Pentingsari burial as burial of the hero against the Dutch colonies. Results and Discussion Community Participation in Bedulu and Pentingsari Village tourism The activity of archeological Bedulu village tourism involves the community in several points. It was started by welcoming procession in Puri Bedulu, tracking to Yeh Pulu Relief, Goa Gajah, visiting historical sites and culture to the temples, hiking, shopping in the market, cooking class, learning how to dance, making offerings (mejejahitan), mebombong, painting eggs and activities which are individually done by tourists with the host.At night tourists was served dinner with kecak dance performance. The impact arose from these activities is very positive and influent the economic, socio-cultural and village environment. The pictures of tourists activities in Bedulu village tourism can be shown as follows: Figure 1 shows tourists’ activities in Bedulu village tourism, Gianyar
Breakfast and preparation went to primary school in Bedulu went for tracking in paddy fields
www.ijmer.in
9
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Arrived in Yeh Pulu Relief Went to Goa Gajah visited the site, made skewer
Made offerings, painted eggs, mebombong, learned Balinese dance Picture 7.3 Activities in Bedulu Village tourism The activities in Pentingsari village tourism were not different with Bedulu village tourism. The second activity of the environmentbased village tourism and combined with cultural activities including tracking, hiking, visiting historical sites, picking fruit, making batik, learning puppet show, making the webbing, plugging the fields, activities in camping ground, cooking traditional foods and staying in home stays belong to the community. Figure 7.4 shows the activities of Pentingsari village tourism.
Arrived at Pentingsari homestay visited Watu Gajah went for, fishing www.ijmer.in
10
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Picked the fruits made batik learned puppet show, danced ,went camping Picture 7.4 Activities in PentingsariVillage tourism All of the activities carried out need assistance and aid local communities. These activities directly gave socio-cultural, environmental and economic values and benefit for the local community. 2.
The Comparison and Socio-Cultural, Environmental and Economic Model The impact of community participation in managing Bedulu and Pentingsari village tourism is depicted in Figure 3, as follows:
The comparison between Bedulu and Pentingsari Village tourism can be described as follows:
www.ijmer.in
11
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
1) The results of this study indicate that community participation in Bedulu Tourism Village, Gianyar, Bali, and Pentingsari Tourism Village, Sleman, Yogyakarta is participation as a boost (induced participation) . 2) People participate in conducting various activities associated with the advancement of the tourist village to improve their economic and socio-cultural reinforce stored in the local community so as to preserve the local environment in that area. 3) The meaning of community participation greatly enjoyed and felt by the community itself. There are several findings in this study are : 1) The impact of community participation in the management of this tourist village is the meaning of economic, social, cultural and environmental. 2) Both the tourist village where this study have similarities in the management and development of rural tourism , in terms of both geographic , and cultural destinations . 3) There is a difference in the community and market confidence tourists visiting the Tourism Village Bedulu dominant foreign tourists , while the Tourism Village Pentingsari dominant domestic tourists . 4) Village Tourism prefers Bedulu archaeological tourist village while relying more on the Tourism Village Pentingsari nature .
www.ijmer.in
12
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
The Profil of Two Village tourism; Bedulu dan Pentingsari No 1
Bedulu Nature,
Profil Potential
archeology, relief, local culture, dance, earthenware, painting, tabuh, culinary 2
over 40 people
3
Over Rp. 15.000.000
4
Anak Agung Astawa
6
The number of visits per month
over100 people
Estimates income from Over Rp. village tourism per 75.000.000 month Manager
Mr. Sumardi The Leader of Tourism Awareness
Yeh Pulu Relief,
the nearest tourist
Goa Gajah, Siwa Statue, Tampaksiring,
attractions
-
Nature, historical sites, local culture, dance, tabuh, batik, ploughing, culinary
Dharmodayana Foundation 5
Pentingsari
Achievement as an Village tourism
Borobudur, Gunung Merapi, Golf Course 2nd winner in 2009 Sapta Pesona, 2011 Ist winner of village tourism in 2013
www.ijmer.in
13
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
7
50 people
The number of people
20 people
directly involved 8
50 km / 1,5 hours
The distance from the
30 km / 1 hour
airport / time taken 9
Community Empowerment
10
Independent NCEPRp 150.000.000
11
BTB, BVA, PHRI, educational institution
Icon/ Slogan
Improving communities’ life
government subsidy
Coaching from the government
Coaching from the government / NGO/campus
Government, PHRI
Source: Suartana’s research (2015) Based on the comparison seemed that the management of both villages have a resemblance. The second potential of the tourist village also almost similar therefore the impact of being perceived by the community in socio-cultural, environmental, and economic. The community empowered and involved in village tourism activities, had a fundamental change in the pattern of social interactions, the way of communicating, care to the environment and obtain optimal economic benefits. Thus, village tourism gave positive impact to the life of local community. Conclusions and Suggestions Community participation in the Bedulu and Pentingsari village tourism activities had given positive impact in socio-cultural, environmental, and community economic. Overall this program can increase the life quality and public welfare. The comparison of activities
www.ijmer.in
14
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
in both villages have similarity, therefore the impact perceived by the community also balanced . The community supported the village tourism development, but the competence of its human resources is still low. Therefore training is required related to the improvement of the quality of human resources, related to on line sales/marketing (internet based), serve a cuisine/culinary, foreign language, good lodging management, service quality, and the field of the environment conservation. Reference 1. Arnstein, R. S. 1971, Eight rungs on the ladder of citizen participation, S.E. Cahn, A.B. Passett (Eds.), Citizen participation effecting community change.,New York: Praeger Publishers, New York (1971). pp.: 69–91. 2. Breugel, Van Liedewij. 2013. Community-based tourism: Local Participation and perceived impact. A Comparative study between two communities in Thailand. Master Thesis, Faculty of Social Sciences Radboud University Nijmegen. 3. James, J. 2003. Lord of the village: An Aussie entrepreneur finds Utopia in Indonesian countryside. Time Magazine. 4. Madiun, I. N. 2008. Partisipasi Masyarakat Lokal Dalam Pengembangan Kawasan Pariwisata Nusa Dua (Perspektif Kajian Budaya), Disertasi, Program Pascasarjana, Universitas Udayana, Denpasar. 5. Pretty, J. N. 1995. Participatory Learning for Sustainable Agriculture.World Development 23(8), Hal: 1247-1263. 6. Pretty, J.N. 1995. Regenerating Agriculture: Policies and Practice for Sustainability and Self-Reliance. Earthscan, London; National Academy Press, Washington - adapted from Adnan et al. 1992)
www.ijmer.in
15
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
7. Prihatiyan i 2011, 960 Desa Wisata pada Tahun 2012. Diakses 3 Juni 2013,
www.ijmer.in
16
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
STUDY OF LAND USE CHANGE ON TOURISM AREA USING HIGH SPATIAL RESOLUTION OF REMOTE SENSING IMAGERY I Nyoman Sunarta
Made Sudiana Mahendra
Doctoral Program of Tourism Studies Udayana University, Bali, Indonesia
Doctoral Program of Tourism Studies Udayana University, Bali, Indonesia
A A. Suryawan Wiranatha
Syamsul Alam Paturusi
Doctoral Program of Tourism Studies Udayana University, Bali, Indonesia
Doctoral Program of Tourism Studies Udayana University, Bali, Indonesia
Introduction Understanding determinants of land use in developing countries has become a priority for researchers and policy makers with a wide range of interests [1]. In the other hand, accurate and timely information about land cover in urban areas is crucial for urban land management decision-making, ecosystem monitoring and urban planning [2]. Remote sensing technology has great potential for acquisition of detailed and accurate land-use information for management and planning of urban regions for various purposes [3]. High spatial resolution satellite images offer a great potential for the extraction of land use and land cover related information for urban areas [4]. Although high-resolution imagery in the form of aerial photography has been available for many years, the launch of the IKONOS-2 by Space Imaging in September 1999 has signaled a new era in satellite remote sensing [5]. Utilization of high-resolution imagery data on tourism areas is important to understand causes and their effect Basically, changes in land use are closely related to the availability of land and water. The availability of land and water resources determines www.ijmer.in
17
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
the productivity of the resources and provides information about the potential of production. In general, land use is the result of continuous interaction, balance and dynamic conditions between people’s activities in a certain area and the environmental constraints where they live in. Knowing the land-use distribution and its changes is not only useful for the sustainable management of natural resources, but it can also be used as information for a spatial planning in the future. Theoretically, land-use change is the process in which there is an increase in one type of land use followed by a decrease in another type of land use within different periods of time [6]. Land use change is driven by the interaction in space and time between biophysical and human dimensions [7]. Bali Province, one of the Indonesian tourism destinations, has major changes in land use annually, especially in the coastal area of South Bali [8,9]. In this area, coastal resources and tourism industry have been experiencing a tremendous coastal change due to the tourism development and associated commercial and residential growth. There was also an alarming increase in land-use change in North Kuta District. North Kuta, located in South Bali area, was originally a rice-field area has now become a tourist area. Accommodations especially villas have developed rapidly in this area. Land-use change from paddy fields into settlements happens the most in the South and East namely the areas that are parts of Kerobokan Kelod Village Kerobokan Kaja Village, Dalung Village and Canggu Village [10]. The Land-Use Map shows that there were more conversions of paddy fields into settlements during the period of 1992 to 2003 in the northern region, such as Kerobokan Kaja and Dalung. However, during the next period (2003 to 2008) there was a change in the trend in which land-use change from paddy fields into settlements was more concentrated in the www.ijmer.in
18
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
southern part, such as Kerobokan Kelod and Canggu Village. This condition was driven by the development of the tourism sector which was in fact concentrated in the South and East, as a result of the impact of regional growth in Kuta District which is the generator and the center of tourism growth in South Badung. Various tourist accommodation facilities such as villas and restaurants as well as various supporting facilities seemed to flourish in the South and East parts. Based on the district land-use map of 1992, 2003 and 2008 [10], the southern areas, which mainly comprised of paddy fields in 1992 were gradually converted into settlement areas in 2003, and the change happened more rapidly close to the year of 2008. The development of settlements generally followed the pattern of the road network that existed in that era, especially the roads with the status of the provincial and state roads. This fact is strengthened by the data of land-use change in the level of Kerobokan Kelod Village where the total land-use change from paddy fields into settlements was 21.25 hectares in a span of 3 years (7.8 hectares/year). The purpose of this research is to classify and calculate land-use change from 2006 to 2009 using high spatial resolution remote sensing data in two tourist areas namely Canggu Village and Kerobokan Kelod Village. Both villages are located in North Kuta District and have a quite rapid development in tourism. Data and Methods Research Location The research was conducted in Kerobokan Kelod and Canggu Village, part of North Kuta District in South Bali areas. Fig. 1 indicated the research location. Spatial analysis of remote sensing data was used to analyze the changes in land use in Kerobokan Kelod Sub-district and www.ijmer.in
19
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Canggu Village of North Kuta District. Identification of changes in land use in a region is a process of identifying differences in the presence of an object or phenomenon that is observed at different times. Identification of changes in land use requires a temporal spatial data such as remote sensing data
[9].
sensing
Remote data
for
land-use-change analysis have been used by several researchers to
study
various
subjects [e.g. 8,11,12,13, 14, 15, 16]. However, there are still very few researchers
who
use
remote sensing to study the subject of tourism. Fig. 1 Research Location. Black areas indicated the Canggu Village and Kerobokan Kelod Village.
The
materials
and
devices used in this study were: QuickBird satellite
images
recorded on May 16, 2006, which were used to map the types of land use in 2006; QuickBird satellite images recorded on October 15, 2009, which were used in determining the type of land use in 2009; a digital map of the earth of Indonesia
in the scale of 1:25,000 obtained from the
Geospatial Information Agency (BIG, previously named Bakosurtanal) which was used as a base map in the satellite image interpretation, Global Positioning System (GPS) to determine the coordinates of the research sites, as well as a computer for data analysis of remote sensed www.ijmer.in
20
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
images. Remote sensing satellite image data, QuickBird year 2006 and 2009 were visually interpreted using the approach of interpretation [17]. On-screen digitizing method through computer screens was applied for the visual interpretation process. On-screen digitizing method has been applied for land-use mapping from satellite images carried out independently [9,18,19,20] as well as by organizations in the United States [21]. The results of the analysis with the on-screen interpretation method were evaluated by field observations (to find out the ground truth) to check the correctness level of analysis results that include observations of the types of land use in the areas under the study and their surrounding [22]. The geographical position of the observed location was determined by measuring the coordinates of the observed location using GPS. The data providing information from field observations in the location where the coordinate samples were taken were processed and matched with the data analysis of QuickBird images as the primary resources in refining the analysis and classification of land use. The primary analysis in this study is the analysis of changes in land use for all locations in Kerobokan Kelod Sub-district and Canggu Village of North Kuta District. The total land-use change between the year of 2006 and 2009 was obtained by comparing the areas of types of land in both spatial data. Meanwhile, the total area of land-use types in the two villages/sub districts was obtained by cutting the spatial data of land use in each year of observation with the administrative boundaries of Kerobokan Kelod Sub-district and Canggu Village. ArcGIS 10 software was used in the process of interpretation of land use and spatial analysis of the land use data with the help of Image Analysis extensions while the Microsoft Office Excel 2007 software was used to analyze attribute www.ijmer.in
21
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
data. Based on the analysis results of land use change, detailed verification was performed using Google Earth and field observations. This was done to find out the facts on the ground about the changes and the trends in the use of resources, especially the exploited land and water. By knowing the changes in land use, the type and characteristics of the changes as well as the exploited natural resources, the impacts that will arise can be predicted and the solution to deal with such impacts on natural resources can be anticipated. Results and Discussion The trend of changes in land-use in two sub districts representing two different characters of area, namely Kerobokan Kelod Sub-district that has become an urban area and Canggu Sub-district that is still relatively agrarian, showed interesting dynamics over a span of three years (2006-2009). Kerobokan Kelod as a sub district that is located closer to the epicenter of the tourism development of Kuta (Seminyak and Legian) was noticeably affected more strongly and thus experienced rapid dynamics of land-use change. On the other side, Canggu Sub-district experienced slower dynamics which were apparent in the rice fields that still survived, at least during the period of three years (2006-2009). The dynamic change of land-use in Kerobokan Kelod is indicated for example by the process of land conversion from a rice field area into a non-rice field one over about 21 hectares and also by the shrinking amount of vacant land by 12.6 hectares. Therefore, in total there are about 33 hectares of land that have gone through a change of function into an area of buildings and settlements in Kerobokan Kelod for 3 years (an average of 11 hectares/year). Similarly, the ratio of building www.ijmer.in
22
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
area and green area in Kerobokan Kelod in 2009 already showed an alarming rate, which reached 68.9%. It means the area of constructed land has grown by more than half of the total green/open area (Table 1). From the map in Fig. 2 it is noticeable that the areas experiencing the highest functional changes in Kerobokan Kelod are located on the eastern and southern parts, and are generally positioned close to highways. This phenomenon is evidently a result of the great influence of the development of tourism in Seminyak Sub-district which lies precisely on the south of Kerobokan Kelod. The area of Kerobokan Kelod has turned into some kind of a receiver of the massive development that has already reached its peak in the areas of Seminyak and Legian. The spread of developments that were taking place and recorded until the year 2009 will continue to happen and be directed to the West, which is Canggu Sub-district. This is the area growth phenomenon of ‘effects of the South’ which also occurs in other regions or other villages in South Bali. The settlements in the sub-district of Canggu form a linear pattern which follows the paths of the roads and the river. The settlements that have been formed give an impression that they block or cover the rice fields that are located behind them. The settlements are spread evenly in all parts of the area, whether in the upstream, midstream, or downstream areas. This is in contrast with the pattern of settlement in Kerobokan Kelod which forms a pattern of checkers that are spread out, scattered, and disorganized. The linear pattern formed in Canggu signifies that the village is still agrarian in character. Meanwhile, the dynamics of land-use change in Canggu occur relatively slower. The rate of the reduction of rice-field land is recorded to be only 0.94 hectares, whereas of dry land 0.09 hectares, and of mixed farms 1.34 hectares. Therefore in total there are approximately 2.37 hectares of rice field www.ijmer.in
23
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
land, dry field, and farm land whose functions are converted (an average 0.79 hectares/year). Similarly, the increase in the area of land that serves as constructed land is relatively small, that is 3.75 hectares (Table 2). However, if these data are linked in a rural context it will become clear that what has happened in Canggu has shown a considerably dynamic progress of land-use change. Table 1. Change of Land Use in Kerobokan Kelod Village in 2006 and 2009 Area of land use (hectare) Land Use
2006
2009
Change
Building 158.18 178.89 20.71 Road 16.34 17.08 0.74 Mixed Farm 41.26 43.18 1.92 Swimming Pool 1.22 1.67 0.46 Dry Field 2.51 2.81 0.31 Vacant Land 60.72 48.07 -12.66 Sand 10.73 10.73 0.00 Settlement 252.29 262.02 9.73 Rice Field 185.81 164.56 -21.25 River 0 0 0 An interesting phenomenon occurring in Canggu is the appearance of vacant lands (of approximately 36 hectares) and a large area of shrubs in the border area of the southern beach in Canggu Sub-district (Fig. 3). All this while those vacant lands and the bush lands have been functioning in ecological terms to withstand the onslaught of the abrasion caused by the Southern Beach waves. The vacant lands are most likely lands that are already owned by foreign investors that on a momentum one day will be used for tourist accommodations. At this moment a number of villas have been established along the southern beach of Canggu. www.ijmer.in
24
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
There is a possibility of this phenomenon to be followed by the emergence of other tourist accommodation facilities in the future, along with the increasingly welcoming attitude of the people of Canggu towards the development of tourism. a)
b)
Fig. 2 Land use maps of Kerobokan Kelod Village. (a) 16 May 2006, and (b) 15 October 2009
Based on a further observation through Google Earth and field observations, several propositions can be suggested as follows. The change of land-use in Kerobokan Kelod Sub-district, particularly judged by the development of the buildings and vacant lands occurred far more rapidly than in the village of Canggu. Most of the development with regard to buildings is related to accommodations or villa buildings which are generally built on paddy field areas. This suggests that the declining area of rice fields in Kerobokan Kelod Sub-district (11 hectare/year) is much faster than in the village of Canggu (0.9 hectare/year), and it can be predicted that the development of villa buildings in the village of Canggu will occur more rapidly in line with the development in Kerobokan Kelod Sub-district, so that these two areas will face the problems of shrinking land (rice-field lands) which is the appeal of the area to tourists in addition to being the source of staple www.ijmer.in
25
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
food for the local people. The
type
of
land-use
change
occurring
in
both
of
the
sub-districts/villages is dominated by the change of land-use from rice-fields into buildings. The type of buildings that are flourishing is in general accommodations/villa buildings. The construction of villas in both of these areas are getting interesting to discuss for a reason that each room or villa unit is generally completed with a swimming pool. This indicates that in the two areas people will face the problems of water shortage. This is carried out to identify the actual facts on the change occurring and the trend of the natural resources, particularly land and water, that are being used. By recognizing the change of land-use, the types and characteristics of change that take place as well as the natural resources that are used, the consequential effects can be predicted and an anticipative solution can be determined to protect such natural resources. a)
b)
Fig. 3 Land use maps of Canggu Village. (a) 16 May 2006, and (b) 15 October 2009
www.ijmer.in
26
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Table 2. Change of Land Use in Canggu Village in 2006 and 2009 Land Use Building Road Mixed Farm Swimming Pool Dry Field Vacant Land Sand Settlement Rice Field River Conclusions
Area of land use (hectare) 2006 56.78 18.60 24.10 1.07 72.20 35.73 15.14 115.62 240.48 0.19
2009 60.52 18.62 22.76 1.24 72.12 36.08 15.14 113.71 239.54 0.19
Change 3.75 0.02 -1.34 0.17 -0.09 0.35 0.00 -1.91 -0.94 0.00
The analysis of satellite image data with the geographical information system to obtain the data on land-use and its changes indicate that there was a change in the type of land use in the North Kuta District, especially in Kerobokan Kelod Sub-district and Canggu Village between 2006 and 2009. Kerobokan Kelod Sub-district is the area that undergoes the largest change of land-use, either with an increase or reduction in types of land use. The increasing types of land use that are present in the region are mainly buildings and settlements. Building areas increased by 20.71 hectares during the period of 3 years, while settlements only increased by 9.73 hectares in the same period. Reduction of land-use types that occurred in this region was the reducing area of paddy fields in the total of 21.25 hectares during the period of 3 years followed by the reducing area of vacant land by 12.66 hectares in the same period. Furthermore, Canggu Village had the increasing area of land use in the forms of buildings by 3.75 hectares and vacant land by 0.35 hectares only. Meanwhile, the reduction of land use was in the form of 0.94 www.ijmer.in
27
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
hectares of paddy fields and settlements by 1.91 hectares. If changes in land use that took place in Canggu Village and Kerobokan Kelod Sub-district are compared, changes in Canggu Village are smaller than that of Kerobokan Kelod Sub-district. This happened due to the locations of the two regions, where Kerobokan Kelod Sub-district is closer to Kuta District which is the center of tourism growth in Badung and Bali. Building area developments that occurred in Kerobokan Kelod Sub-district and Canggu Village are generally dominated by tourism facilities in the forms of accommodations or villas. The development and existence of accommodations in this area should receive more attention because in addition to converting fairly extensive areas of paddy fields they will also utilize quite a significant amount of water resources. Thus, the development of tourism in the two regions does not only reduce the paddy field areas but also leads to lower amount of water supply. References 1)
Nelson, G. C., & Geoghegan, J. (2002). Deforestation and land use change: sparse data environments. Agricultural Economics, 27(3), 201-216.
2)
Zhou, W., Troy, A., & Grove, M. (2008). Object-based land cover classification and change analysis in the Baltimore metropolitan area using multitemporal high resolution remote sensing data. Sensors, 8(3), 1613-1636.
3)
Herold, M., Scepan, J., & Clarke, K. C. (2002). The use of remote sensing and landscape metrics to describe structures and changes in urban land uses. Environment and Planning A, 34(8), 1443-1458.
4)
Van de Voorde, T., De Genst, W., Canters, F., Stephenne, N., Wolff, E.,
www.ijmer.in
28
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
& Binard, M. (2004). Extraction of land use/land cover related information from very high resolution data in urban and suburban areas. Remote Sensing in Transition, 237-244. 5)
Sawaya, K. E., Olmanson, L. G., Heinert, N. J., Brezonik, P. L., & Bauer, M. E. (2003). Extending satellite remote sensing to local scales: land and water resource monitoring using high-resolution imagery. Remote Sensing of Environment, 88(1), 144-156.
6)
Wahyunto, M.Z. Abidin, A. Priyono, and Sunaryo. 2001. Studi Perubahan Penggunaan Lahan Di Sub DAS Citarik, Jawa Barat dan DAS Kaligarang, Jawa Tengah. Prosiding Seminar Nasional Multifungsi Lahan Sawah. Balai Penelitian Tanah. Bogor.
7)
Veldkamp, A. Verburg, P. H., 2004. Modeling Land Use Changes and Environmental Impact: Introduction to the Special issues. Journal of Environmental Management. 72: 1-3.
8)
As-syakur, A.R. 2011. Perubahan Penggunaan Lahan Di Provinsi Bali. Ecotrophic, 6(1). 1-7.
9)
As-syakur, A.R., I.W. Suarna, I.W.S. Adnyana, I.W. Rusna, I.A.A. Laksmiwati, and I.W. Diara. 2010. “Studi Perubahan Penggunaan Lahan Di DAS Badung”. Jurnal Bumi Lestari, 10(2). pp. 200-207.
10)
Bappeda Badung, 2011. Rencana detil Tata Ruang Kecamatan Kuta Utara. Laporan Badung Bappeda.
11)
Weng, Q. 2002. Land use change analysis in the Zhujiang Delta of China using satellite remote sensing, GIS and stochastic modelling. Journal of environmental management, 64(3), 273-284.
12)
Herold, M., Scepan, J., Müller, A., and Günther, S. 2002. Object-oriented mapping and analysis of urban land use/cover using IKONOS data. In Geoinformation for European-wide Integration:
www.ijmer.in
29
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Proceedings of the 22nd Earsel Symposium on Remote Sensing, Prague, Czech Republic, June 4-6, 2002. 13)
Wu, Q., Li, H.Q., Wang, R-S., Paulussen, J., He, Y., Wang, M., Wang, B-H., and Wang, Z. 2006. Monitoring and predicting land use change in Beijing using remote sensing and GIS. Landscape and Urban Planning, 78(4), 322-333.
14)
Rogan, J., and Chen, D. 2004. Remote sensing technology for mapping and monitoring land-cover and land-use change. Progress in planning, 61(4), 301-325.
15)
Yuan, F. 2008. Land ‐ cover change and environmental impact analysis in the Greater Mankato area of Minnesota using remote sensing and GIS modelling. International Journal of Remote Sensing, 29(4), 1169-1184.
16)
Brown, J. C., Kastens, J. H., Coutinho, A. C., Victoria, D. D. C., and Bishop, C. R. 2013. Classifying multiyear agricultural land use data from Mato Grosso using time-series MODIS vegetation index data. Remote Sensing of Environment, 130, 39-50.
17)
Yagoub, M. M. 2004. Monitoring of urban growth of a desert city through remote sensing: Al-Ain, UAE, between 1976 and 2000. International Journal of Remote Sensing, 25(6), 1063-1076.
18)
Wikantika, K., Sinaga, A., Hadi, F., & Darmawan, S. (2007). Quick assessment on identification of damaged building and land‐use changes in the post‐tsunami disaster with a quick‐look image of IKONOS and Quickbird (a case study in Meulaboh City, Aceh). International Journal of Remote Sensing, 28(13-14), 3037-3044.
19)
Doygun, H., Alphan, H., and Gurun, D. K. (2008). Analysing urban expansion and land use suitability for the city of Kahramanmaraş,
www.ijmer.in
30
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Turkey, and its surrounding region. Environmental monitoring and assessment, 145(1-3), 387-395. 20)
Deng, X., and Liu, J. (2012). Mapping Land-Cover and Land-Use Changes in China. Remote Sensing of Land Use and Land Cover: Principles and Applications, 8, 339.
21)
Lacy, R. 1992. South Carolina finds economical way to update digital road data. GIS World, 5, 58–60.
22)
Murthy, C.S., S. Jonna, and P.V. Raju. (1995). "Paddy Field Prediction in Bhadra Project Command Area Using Remote Sensing Data". Asian Pacific Remote Sensing Journal 8(1): 79-84.
www.ijmer.in
31
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
EXAMINING THE ONLINE DESTINATION IMAGE OF RURAL AREAS IN BALI: CASE STUDY PEMUTERAN VILLAGE Made Sandhi Yuliarsa Udayana University Bali, Indonesia
Putu Sucita Yanthy Udayana University Bali,Indonesia
Introduction Nowadays, tourism is considered as one of the most popular activities that has a significant impact on the socio-economic development of a country especially in many rural destinations (Fun, Chiun, Songan and Nair, 2014). Jaafar, Rasoolimanesh and Lonik (2015) stated that rural revitalization and development can be achieved with the aid of the rural tourism.Although rural tourism is considered as a small-scale activity and an alternative to mass tourism, it is believed that the development of rural tourism could bring several advantages to the local community in terms of economic growth as well as increasing standards of livings (Nunkoo and Grusoy, 2012 cited in Jaafar, Rasoolimanesh and Lonik, 2015). Because of these benefits to the local community and increasing popularity of many rural destinations, therefore, it is important to be able to convey a positive destination image of a rural area as a mean of informing and marketing effort. The image of destination is important since it can be used to construct individual’s perception of a destination that influence the process of decision making to visit and re-visit (Cooper, 2012). At present, there has been an increase in the use of the internet as a marketing tool to develop an online destination image. It is believed that an online destination image can be utilized as a powerful tool for managing and promoting a destination (Zhou, 2014).
www.ijmer.in
32
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
An online marketing tool to promote tourism in Indonesia is also being implemented by the Indonesian government through its tourism ministry. The online marketing strategy to promote Indonesia’s tourism is reflected in the coordination meeting of National Tourism Strategy 2015 held in Jakarta, where the focus of the meeting is on online and offline branding and promotion as part of Indonesia tourism marketing strategy (Hutabarat, 2014). The online promotional tools to promote tourism in Indonesia include mobile application, digital campaign, interactive campaign, social media, online advertising, and enewsletter in order to be able to create creative and innovative promotional contents and to build an interactive communication among the internet communities to get an insight about a destination through a testimony posted on the social media platform (Hutabarat, 2014). While there have been many researches on online destination images, however, currently only few studies focuses on online rural destination images (Zhou, 2014). Because of this reason, therefore, there is a need to conduct more research on this topic. This topic is also important because an online destination image could also be used to link the representations of rural characteristics with the rural destination marketing.Additionally, an urgent need of development of online rural destination image studies is also triggered by an increase in popularity of rural destination among travelers (Dwivedi, Yadav dan Patel, 2009). Therefore, this study is going to focus the online destination image of Pemuteran village as one of the rural destinations in Bali and to identify area for improvement to make better destination image.Pemuteran village located around 50 km west of Singaraja regency with Pemuteran beach as the main attraction of Pemuteran Village (Dinas Kebudayaan & Pariwisata Pemkab Buleleng, 2013).
www.ijmer.in
33
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Methodology The aim of this study is to examine the destination image of rural area in Pemuteran village Bali as one of the alternative form of tourism that its popularity has been increasing. Because of the nature of the research topic, therefore the qualitative approach is adopted in this study. The data collection is performed using an online search through the internet. In the tourism research, an internet search is a common data collection method which includes searching through website, online reviews, blogs, online forums and social media (Jani and Hwang, 2011, Son, 2011, Tse and Zang, 2013 and Xiang and Gretzel, 2010 cited in Zhou, 2014). For the purpose of this research, the data collection process is collected through an online search using Google as the main search tool.All the collected dataare categorized into three main categories include the government and travel information site, newspaper and consumer opinions to identify the projected image of Pemuteran village as one of the tourism destinations in Bali. The government data are all the data available from the official government website and official Indonesia tourism website. Travel information data are all the information from travel information website likes the lonely planet. Government and travel site tend to provide all the information to persuade the potential tourist to visit, so this category is an induced source (Dwivedi, 2009). The second category which is the newspaper is an autonomous or independent sources, whereas the consumer opinion is an organic source of information where travelers share their travel experiences in the form of storytelling, so that other potential tourist could gain an insight about the destination (Dwivedi, et al., 2009). The qualitative data analysis is performed using Nvivo 10 as the qualitative analysis software. In qualitative research, there are ten types of text analysis that can be used to analyze all the data gathered.
www.ijmer.in
34
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
In this research, qualitative content analysis is implemented where the main focus of this type of analysis is on the text content or contextual meaning constructed by the characteristics of the language (Tesch, 1990 and Hsiu-Fang and Shannon, 2005 cited in Wahyuni, 2015). Webber (1990 cited in Wahyuni, 2015) stated that qualitative content analysis is not only about counting words but it is more related on the process of examining and classifying extensive range of words into categories that has the same meaning. The qualitative content analysis used in this research is the directed approach where the process of analysis is guided by a relevant theory or from previous research result to answer the research questions (Wahyuni, 2015). All the post in regards to Pemuteran village were analyzed using the destination image dimensions proposed by Beerli and Martin (2004), who classified the factors influencing the image assessments by travelers into nine dimensions (Table 1). The dimensions include natural resources; general infrastructure; tourist infrastructure; tourist leisure and recreation; culture, history and art; political and economic factors; natural environment; social environment; and atmosphere of the place (Beerli and Martin, 2004). Table 1. Dimensions/Attributes Determining the Perceived Destination Image Natural Resources
General Infrastructure
Weather Temperature Rainfall Humidity Hours of sunshine Beaches Quality of seawater Sandy or rocky beaches Length of the beaches Overcrowding of beaches
Development and quality of roads, airports and ports Private and public transport facilities Development of health services Development of telecommunications Development of commercial
www.ijmer.in
Tourist Infrastructure Hotel and self-catering accommodation Number of beds Categories Quality Restaurants Number Categories Quality Bars, discotheques and clubs 35
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Wealth of countryside Protected nature reserves Lakes, mountains, deserts, etc Variety and uniqueness of flora and fauna Tourist Leisure and Recreation Themes parks Entertainment and sports activities Golf, fishing, hunting, skiing, scuba diving, etc Water parks Zoos Trekking Adventure activities Casinos Night life Shopping Natural Environment Beauty of the scenery Attractiveness of the cities and towns Cleanliness Overcrowding Air and noise pollution Traffic congestion
infrastructures Extent of building development
Culture, History and Art Museums, historical buildings, monuments, etc Festival, concerts, etc Handicraft Gastronomy Folklore Religion Customs and ways of life
Social Environment Hospitality and friendliness of the local residents Under privilege and poverty Quality of life Language barriers
Ease of access to destination Excursions at the destination Tourist centers Network of tourist information Political and Economic Factors Political stability Political tendencies Economic development Safety Crime rate Terrorist attacks Prices
Atmosphere of the Place Luxurious Fashionable Place with a good reputation Family-oriented destination Exotic Mystic Relaxing Stressful Fun, enjoyable Pleasant Boring Attractive or interesting
Source: Beerli and Martin, 2004, p. 659
www.ijmer.in
36
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Discussion Firstly, all the information in the form of words and phrases that have been gathered from online sources like twitter, online news article, online travel information and government owned website were analyzed by creating a frequency table based on the number of occurrence in the article found online. Cakmak and Isaac (2012) stated that the words frequency table can be used to understand all the words used to portray many destination attributes of the destination like attraction, accommodation, transportation, people, feelings and experiences. The words frequency table in showed in Table 2 of study is completed using the word queries function in Nvivo 10 as the tools of qualitative data analysis. Table 2. The most frequently used words and phrase No
Words
1
Pemuteran
643
20
Sea
37
2
Bali
556
21
Snorkeling
52
3
Rural
115
22
Garden
50
4
Temple
120
23
Resort
30
5
Indonesia
87
24
Water
29
6
Travel
137
25
Districts
26
7
Reef
187
26
Activity
25
8
Biorock
66
27
Singaraja
25
9
Buleleng
65
28
#bali
23
10
Beach
127
29
Places
23
11
Diving
54
30
Community
22
www.ijmer.in
Count
No
Words
Count
37
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
12
Underwater
53
31
World
22
13
Village
53
32
Review
21
14
Hotel
92
33
Tourist
21
15
Tourism
80
34
Agung
20
16
Coral
43
35
Dive
20
17
Menjangan
39
36
Gerokgak
20
18
Area
38
37
Fish
20
19
Island
57
38
Bay
19
According the frequency table in Table 2, it can be seen that all the information gathered online contain Pemuteran and Bali as the most used word. The table also reveals that Pemuteran is located in the rural area since the third most frequently used word is rural. Interestingly, the word temple has been mentioned repeatedly as well in many sources that indicate the main tourist attraction located in Pemuteran village. This situation is in accordance with many online travel information site that provide thorough information in regards to the existence of underwater temple garden. For example, the information related to the underwater temple is mentioned in the Indonesian government travel information site Wonderful Indonesia (Wonderful Indonesia, 2013). In order to answer the research question proposed in this study which is to examine the online destination image of rural areas in Bali, therefore, the nine destination image dimension or attribute proposed by Beerli and Martin (2004) is used. The first attribute is the natural resources like the weather, beaches and mountains that attract potential tourist to visit a tourist destination. The main attraction of Pemuteran village other than the location that located in the rural area
www.ijmer.in
38
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
is the beach area with its beautiful coral reef. The main selling point that the local government tried to reveal can be summarized as follow: The beach in this area contains beautiful coral reef which is good for diving and snorkeling activity. Besides the visitors can also enjoy the wonderful sunset that is backed by Semeru mountain in East Java. Some good accommodations, clinic and restaurants can be found around this area(Dinas Kebudayaan & Pariwisata Pemkab Buleleng, 2013). In the same way, the online travel information site described Pemuteran village as a peaceful fishing village that has been developed carefully so that once the tourist have made the trip once, they tend to return again (FrommerMedia, 2015). The Frommer Media (2015) also portrayed the destination as a large bay that has no nightlife, no hawkers on the beach and no jet skis. Pemuteran village is just a good place to swim and to dive. The most important natural resources attribute from the point of view of consumer that might attract potential tourist to visit is the Biorock project as part of the protected nature reserve sub-attribute. The main purpose of this project is to rebuild and preserve the coral reef in Pemuteran beach where this project could be found in Taman Sari Hotel (TripAdvisor, 2015). Based on the discussion regarding the natural resource, therefore, it can be said that the three sources provide the similar information about the Pemuteran village with the beach and coral reef as the main attraction. The second and third dimension is the general and ttourist infrastructure. According to Beerli and Martin (2014), an increase in the attractiveness of a destination could be resulted from a welldeveloped general infrastructure of that destination that could support the tourism activities. From the search result from the government website the only information that could be gained was the approximate time to travel to Pemuteran from Denpasar that might require three to
www.ijmer.in
39
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
four hours of driving by a rented car (Wonderful Indonesia, 2013). However, the newspapers emphasize on the condition of the road infrastructure where there are many damaged road in Pemuteran village. In addition, many roads leading to the house of the local community that are still very narrow even though many of the houses started to become a homestay (Bali Post, 2012).The other problem is the scarcity of clean water, where the local residents and tourism stakeholder exploited ground water to fulfil their daily water needs. This situation will lead to reduced ground water reserves (BaliPost, 2012). Furthermore, the online travel guide and consumer sources have shown transportation as the main problem to get to the destination where there are lack of public transport availability and the price to rent a car with driver relatively high (TravelFish, 2011). Moreover, the three sources maintain a complete list of accommodation available in Pemuteran village. Accoding to Bali Discovery (2015), there are 18 homestay and bungalows, 10 hotel-resorts and spas, 5 villas, 20 restaurants and warung (small local restaurant), and 14 diving operators. From this discussion, it can be seen that the general and tourist infrastructure in Pemuteran village needs to be improved especially related to the condition of the road. The fourth and fifth dimension are tourist, leisure and recreation and culture, history and art. For these two dimensions, all the three sources deliver similar information in regard to tourist activates that can be done which include snorkeling, diving and learn about the reef conservation program. However, the next two dimension which are the political and economic factors of the destination and social environment dimension were not discussed since there were no data found in any of the available online sources for this study. Therefore, this might provide an opportunity for further research by incorporating this dimension. The next dimension are the natural environment and www.ijmer.in
40
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
atmosphere of the place. Based on the data gathered from an online newspaper, it was stated the atmosphere in Pemuteran village is very quiet, therefore it could lead to another type of tourism which is spiritual tourism (Muhjir, 2013).However, one of the online travel sources found that there are many rubbish floating on the water that come and go depending on the currents. The rubbish problem stated in the online travel information site is as followed: “While you will see a lot of fish at both Pemuteran and Menjangan, you'll all too often see the dreaded "plastic bag fish". It's known for its distinctive coloring, often reading mie goreng. On our first day of snorkeling at Pemuteran, the amount of rubbish floating on the water was amazing. According to locals it comes and goes depending on the currents and while a concerted effort is made to remove it on a daily basis, it just keeps coming. So keep your fingers crossed for an offshore breeze when you arrive!” (Travel Fish, 2011) Based on the discussion above, therefore, there is an urgent need to solve the floating rubbish problem since it could lead to bad perception of the destination so it will damage the image of Pemuteran village. Table 3 provide the summary of the dimension and attribute for Pemuteran village’s destination image. All the dimensions and attributes need to be considered by tourism stakeholder in order to maintain destination attractiveness. Table. 3 Dimensions and attribute for Pemuteran village’s destination image Dimensions Natural Resources
www.ijmer.in
Government/Online Travel Information Beach Rural area Beautiful coral reef
Online Newspapers Beach Rural area Beautiful coral reef
Consumer data Beach Rural area Biorock project to preserve the coral 41
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
General/Tourist Infrastructure
Accommodation Lack of public transport
Tourist Leisure and Recreation&Culture, History and Art
Snorkeling Diving Learning about BioRock program
Natural Environmentand Atmosphere of the Place
Amazing coral reef Floating rubbish
Damaged road Narrow road Water scarcity Snorkeling Diving Learning about BioRock program Amazing coral reef Quite environment Spiritual tourism
reef Lack of public transport Expensive rented car Snorkeling Diving Learning about BioRock program Amazing coral reef Relax atmosphere
Source: Adapted from Beerli and Martin, 2004 Conclusion Pemuteran village is considered as one of the alternative tourism destination in the form of rural tourism where the main attraction of this destination is the beach with its beautiful underwater coral reef. Although Pemuteran village is known for its success in implementing Biorock project to heal and preserve the coral reef in that area, however there are some problems that require urgent attention especially by the policy makers in order to sustain the success and the online image of Pemuteran village as an alternative destination. The most critical problem is related with the general and tourist infrastructure dimension where many road are damaged and too narrow. Another problem that need to be solved immediately is the water scarcity as well as the availability of public transport to get to the destination, so that Pemuteran village could remain competitive that will lead to sustainable economic growth. Amid all of the problems, there is an opportunity for the policy makers to promote spiritual tourism in
www.ijmer.in
42
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Pemuteran village, the reason for this is because the quiet, peaceful and relax atmosphere of Pemuteran village. Limitation This study and its findings have several limitations. While this research focuses on examining the online destination image of rural area in Bali, it only examining one rural destination which is Pemuteran village, so the findings of this study could not be generalized. Therefore, there is an opportunity to include other rural destinations. The second limitation is the consumer source of information used in this research only included twitter and it did not take into consideration any other microblog like the facebook or any travel forums where many discussion regarding a destination happened. Consequently, it is expected that customer comment on the facebook and travel forums could be incorporated for the further study. References 1. Bali Discovery, 2015. Building sustainable tourism communities: The success story of community-based tourism development in the North Bali Village of Pemuteran. Available from:
. [16 Jun 2015]. 2. BaliPost, 2012. Pemuteran jadi wisata kerakyatan: Warga local antusias, jalan masih rusak. Available from: . [10 Jun 2015]. 3. Beerli, A. and Martin, J. D. Factors influencing destination image. Annals of Tourism Research. Vol. 31. No. 3. Pp. 657-681. 4. Cakmak, E. and Isaac, R. K. 2012. What destination marketers can learn from their visitors’ blogs: An image analysis of Bethlehem,
www.ijmer.in
43
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Palestine. Journal of Destination Marketing & Management. Vol. 1. Pp. 124-133. 5. Cooper, C. 2012. Essentials of Tourism, England: Pearson Education Limited. 6. Dinas Kebudayaan & Pariwisata Pemkab Buleleng, 2013. Place of Interest. Available from: . [5 June 2015]. 7. Dwivedi, M. 2009. Online destination image of India: a consumer based perspective. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management. Vol. 21. No. 2. Pp. 226-232. 8. Dwivedi, M., Yadav, A., and Patel, V. R. 2009. The online destination image of Goa. Worldwide Hospitality and Tourism Themes. Vol. 1. No 1. Pp. 25-39. 9. Fun, F. S., Chiun, L. M., Songan, P., and Nair., V. 2014. The impact of local communities’ involvement and relationship quality on sustainable rural tourism in rural area, Sarawak: The moderating impact of self-efficacy. 5th Asia Euro Conference. Vol. 144. pp. 60-65. 10. Hutabarat, A. 2014. Strategi Nasional Pemasaran Pariwisata 2015. Available from: . [5 June 2015]. 11. Jaafar, M., Rasoolimanesh, S. M., and Lonik, K. A. T. 2015. Tourism growth and entrepreneurship: Empirical analysis of development of rural highlands. Tourism Management Perspectives. Vol. 14. Pp. 1724. 12. Muhaji, A., 2013. Enjoying the quite, exotic Pemuteran in Bali’s north. Available from: .
[20
Jun
2015].
www.ijmer.in
44
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
13. TravelFish, 2011. Pemuteran: Travel Guide. Available from: . [15 Jun 2015]. 14. TripAdvisor,
2015.
Pemuteran
traveler
article:
Pemuteran
Background. Available from: . [ 10 Jun 2015]. 15. Wahyuni, S. 2015. Qualitative Research Method: Theory and Practice. 2nd edn. Indonesia: Penerbit Salemba Empat. 16. Wonderful Indonesia, 2013. The serene Pemuteran Beach and its phenomenal underwater temple. Available from: . [6 Jun 2015]. 17. Zhou, L. 2014. Online rural destination image: Tourism and rurality. Journal of Destination Marketing and Management. Vol. 3. No. 4. Pp. 227-240.
www.ijmer.in
45
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
THE EFFECT OF SERVICE QUALITY IN INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT I GUSTI NGURAH RAI ON SATISFACTION, IMAGE, TOURISTS LOYALTY WHO VISITED BALI Saroha Manullang Student of Ph.D Degree Post-Graduate Udayana University Bali, Indonesia
Komang Gde Bendesa Advisor of Disertasi Udayana University Bali, Indonesia
Nyoman Darma Putra Co-Advisor of Disertasi Udayana University, Bali, Indonesia
A. Introduction Travel and tourism is one of the largest service industries in the world. When tourism is well planned, it can generate benefits at the destination by increasing tourist receipts, government revenue, and employment. For more successful tourism development, it is crucial to attract tourists and to recommend the destination for others to revisit. Recent tourism marketing researches focus mainly on tourist loyalty to a destination, tourist satisfaction and perceived service quality, and destination image (Archana dan Subha, 2012; LeBlanc & Nguyen, 2001; Konecnik, 2004; Teck Hua et.al, 2005; Jamal dan Goode, 2001). Martin-Cejas (2005) stated tourism service is a commodity whose quality depends on the aspects that are intrinsic attributes of several activities related with this kind of service: activities that happen from tourists’ arrival till their departure. Airport infrastructure is the first and last point of tourists’ contact in their holiday destination; thus, it constitutes the mobility axe of tourists. These activities have to be ”processed” through airport in an efficient way to minimize travel time and to enjoy shopping and leisure time in the commercial area of www.ijmer.in
46
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
the airport at the end of their holidays. Because of that, it is relevant to evaluate airport facilities quality as a factor of tourism service commodity. Arief (2008) found that the airport affected by positive and negative assessment of passengers. Positive assessment of the physical appearance of the airport, the appearance of officers, the availability of terminal facilities. Negative assessment of the use of airport as a means of promotion and advertising, the reliability of facilities and infrastructure supporting public service facilities such as toilets, parking and traffic flows do not meet standard level of service. Setyaningsih study (2010) showed that the dimensions of service quality in international airport that is tangible, empathy, reliability, responsiveness and assurance effect on passenger satisfaction. In this study emphasized that the passengers always expect the airport in a clean condition, safe and comfortable, so that passengers get comfortable while in the airport. According to Martin-Cejas (2005) the airport infrastructures are the first contact point for tourists when they arrive at their holiday destination. Therefore, airport facilities give them the first impression they will have about the expected quality of their holiday time. When passengers are processed by airports they use several services such as, check-in, passport and security controls in departure, and baggage claim service and passport control when arriving. So, Martin-Cejas (2005) said, tourism service quality begins at the airport. As a first contact with foreign tourists who visited Bali, in fact there are many foreign tourists who complained to service quality of Ngurah Rai International Airport Bali. The complaints against the service, comfort and cleanliness. Therefore this
research focus on
service quality of Ngurah Rai International Airport Bali, especially after a complete renovation of this airport.
www.ijmer.in
47
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
B. Problem Formulation Based on the above background, the formulation of research problems can be expressed in the following research question: 1. How does the effect of service quality of Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport on tourists satisfaction? 2. How does the effect of service quality of Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport on image of Bali tourism? 3. How does the effect of the image of Bali tourism and service quality of Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport on loyalty of tourists visiting Bali? 4. How does the effect of tourism?
tourists satisfaction on image of Bali
5. How does the effect of tourists satisfaction on the loyalty of tourists visiting Bali? 6. How does the indirect effect of image of Bali tourism on tourists loyalty through tourists satisfaction? 7. How does the indirect effect of service quality Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport on tourists loyalty through tourism image? C. Theoretical Framework 1. The effect of service quality on tourists satisfaction Parasuraman el. Al (2009) stated that satisfaction is the customers’ evaluation of a product or service in terms of whether that product or service has met their needs and expectations. Satisfaction can be associated with feelings of pleasure to services. It means that customer satisfaction is the degree to which the perceived service quality to meet expectations, if the quality of service below
www.ijmer.in
48
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
expectations, customers feel dissatisfied. expectations, then the customer is satisfied.
If performance meets
Research conducting by Movafegh and Movafegh (2013); AlAbabneh (2013); Ali and Howaidee (2012); and Hossain (2012) showed that service quality has positive effect on customer satisfaction in the tourism industry. The following hypothesis is therefore proposed: H1: Service quality of Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport has positive and significant effect on tourists satisfaction 2. The effect of service quality on tourism image According to Parasuraman (2009)service quality to be said said qualified the as expected, then the quality of service was rated as satisfactory quality. If the service received exceed customer expectations, then the quality of service can be defined as the ideal qualities, and vice versa. Thus whether or not a quality of service depends on the ability of service providers expectations consistently.
to meet customer
Regarding to Gronroons (2009) experience in use of services is a function of two dimensions of quality of technical quality is what customers acquired as a result of transactions between providers and users of services and functional quality is how the customer to obtain these services. Two-dimensional models define the image quality of these services from service providers. Research Rahayu (2014) proved that koalitas services have a relationship with the image of the service provider. It is also raised by Rahadhini (2013) who in his research concluded that the quality of service received by tourists. The following hypothesis is therefore proposed: H2: Service quality of Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport has positive and significant effect on image of Bali tourism. www.ijmer.in
49
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
3. The effect of the tourism image and service quality on tourism loyalty Tourism image is a good impression of the tourism destination formed through the process at any time information from a variety of trusted sources of information. The research results Lamidi and Rahadhini (2013) indicated the tourist image has positive effect on the tourist loyalty. Likewise, the research of Rahayu (2014) shows the image of an effect has loyalty. Most people are now beginning to show demand for excellent service, they no longer just need a product or service quality, but they prefer to enjoy the convenience of service (Tasunar, 2006). Tourist loyalty is a deep commitment from the tourists to the quality of services provided by a tourist attraction that is manifested in the desire to revisit and positive recommendation (Lamidi, 2013). The following hypothesis is therefore proposed: H3: Image of Bali tourism and service quality of Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport have positive and significant effect on loyalty of tourists visiting Bali 4. The effect of tourists satisfaction on image tourism Tourist satisfaction is a feeling or response tourists, which is happy or disappointed that comes from comparing the performance of an attraction with expectations (Lamidi, 2013). This satisfaction can inform to friends, family or the public, so the image of the tourism will increase. The following hypothesis is therefore proposed: H4: Tourists satisfaction has positive and significant effect on image of Bali tourism. 5. The effect of tourists satisfaction on tourism loyalty According Wibowo and Yuniawati (2009) the increasing number of tourists associated with the added value that they get in the form of www.ijmer.in
50
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
knowledge and cultural experience and satisfaction, which ultimately may increase the chance to come back. According to Ike Janita Goddess (2012) various empirical research shows that tourist satisfaction can help increase the number of tourist arrivals to the destination. Research by Sulistiyani (2010) concluded that the tourist satisfaction has an effect on tourist loyalty. Results of this study was supported by Lamidi and Rahadhini (2013) research which shows the tourist satisfaction has positive effect on tourist loyalty. The following hypothesis is therefore proposed: H5: Tourists satisfaction has positive and significant effect on the loyalty of tourists visiting Bali 6. The indirect effect of tourism image on tourists loyalty through tourists satisfaction Based on the theory from Barnes (2003) and associated with previous research by Wibowo and Yuniawati 2009 and Coban (2012), can be obtained that the image that influence on customer loyalty does not happen by itself but through the stage of satisfaction. In other words, customer satisfaction can act as variables that mediate the relationship between variables. To realize loyal customers, customer must be satisfied first and customer satisfaction can occur if formed a good opinion about the product or service. Research by Lamidi and Rahadhini (2013) states the importance of customer satisfaction as mediating variables become important information for the manager and the entrepreneur in Attractions Bannerman Tlatar for optimizing tourists loyalty. Through this study concluded that tourists satisfaction plays a mediating variables influence Attractions Bannerman Tlatar image on tourists loyalty. Research by Rahayu (2014) also shows the image
www.ijmer.in
51
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
tourists destination has positive effect on loyalty through satisfaction. The following hypothesis is therefore proposed: H6: Image of Bali tourism has indirect effect on tourists loyalty through tourists satisfaction. 7. The indirect effect of service quality on tourists loyalty through tourism image It has been mentioned that service quality has positive effect on loyalty (Movafegh and Movafegh, 2013; Al-Ababneh 2013; Ali and Howaidee 2012; and Hossain, 2012). Meanwhile, in building a good image there are several relevant factors to be studied further. Meenaghan and Shipley (2009) pointed out the importance of communication in improving the image of tourism. It is also stated by Graeff (2006), which are more specifically discussed the importance of the promotion of tourism in building an image. Lamidi and Rahadhini (2013) showed that the image of the attraction Bannerman Tlatar Boyolali has significant impact on tourists satisfaction. Results of this study was supported by Rahayu (2014) which shows that the image has a positive effect on satisfaction. The following hypothesis is therefore proposed: H7: service quality Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport has indirect effect on tourists loyalty through tourism image D. Research Method 1. Methods This study investigates the impact of Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport service quality on tourists satisfaction, tourists image, and tourists loyalty. For this purpose, tourists experience was accumulated. Quantitative data was collected to gather the responses of the tourists www.ijmer.in
52
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
through questionnaires. Each variable has its own set of questions which measure it. 2. Sample: The study was conducted on Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport and sample size of the study 348 tourists. Accidental sampling technique was used to gather the data. The questionnaire was filled by the respondent and requested them to fill it properly. 3. Research Instrument: There are four variables in this study and each of them has separate set of questions. Questionnaire was constructed on 4 points from modified Likert scale.
www.ijmer.in
53
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
4. Statistical Tool: The collected data was then analyzed through Structural Equation Modeling (SEM) technique with partial least square program. The data analysis was based on the conceptual model as follows:
Figure 1. The Conceptual Model
E. Result and Discussion Analysis of Structural Equation Model (SEM) in Full Model was used to test models and hypothesis in this study. Testing the model in Structural Equation Model done with significance test causality through path coefficient. Further test results shown in the figure below. www.ijmer.in
54
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Figure 2 Structural Equation Modeling (SEM) Models Results of testing hypotheses based on structural equation described earlier can be described as follows. 1. For the path coefficients to 1 of 0.248 and 8.713 for Distributioncount values obtained with α significance level of 5%, then the value Distributiontables or t0.05.348 = 1.967, because Distributioncount = 8.713 greater than Distributiontables = 1.967, then H0 rejected, which means service quality of Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport has significant aand positive effect on tourist satisfaction. 2. For the path coefficients to 2 of 0.135 and 6.283 for Distributioncount
values obtained with α significance level of 5%,
then the value Distributiontables or t0.05.348 = 1.967, because Distributioncount = 6.283 greater than Distributiontables= 1.967, then www.ijmer.in
55
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
H0 rejected, which means service quality of Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport has significant and positive effect on tourism image. 3. For path coefficients and 2 against 3 of 0,049 and 0.041, and obtained values of 4.036 and 4.001 Distributioncount with α significance level of 5%, then the value Distributiontables or t0.05.348 = 1.967, because Distributioncount = 4.036 and 4.001 greater than Distributiontables = 1.967, then H0 rejected, which means tourism image and service quality Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport have significant and positive effect on tourist loyalty. 4. For 1 against 2 path coefficient of 0.085 and 4.154 for Distributioncount values obtained with α significance level of 5%, then the value Distributiontables or t0.05.348 = 1.967, because Distributioncount = 4.154 greater than Distributiontables = 1.967, then H0 rejected, which means tourist satisfaction has significant and positive effect on tourism image. 5. For 1 against 3 path coefficient of 0.133 and 6.023 for Distributioncount values obtained with α significance level of 5%, then the value Distributiontables or t0.05.348 = 1.967, because Distributioncount = 6.023 greater than Distributiontables = 1.967, then H0 rejected, which means tourist satisfaction has positive and significant effect on tourist loyalty. 6. For 2 path coefficients to
3 through 1
of
0.022 and
Distributioncount values obtained at 12.376 with significance level α of 5%, then the value Distributiontables or t0.05.348 = 1.967, because Distributioncount = 12.376 bigger than Distributiontables = 1.967, H0 rejected, which means tourism image has indirect effect positive and significant on tourist loyalty through tourists satisfaction. 7. For the path coefficients to 3 through 2 of 0.017 and 9.668 for values obtained Distributioncount with α significance level of 5%, then www.ijmer.in
56
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
the value Distributiontables or t0.05.348 = 1.967, because Distributioncount = 9.668 greater than Distributiontables = 1.967, then H0 is rejected which means service quality Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport has indirect effect positive and significant on tourists loyalty through tourism image. F. Conclusion and Recommendation 1. Conclusion Based on the results of research and discussion, it can be concluded the following: a. Service Quality of Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport has positive and significant effect on tourist satisfaction. This means that the service quality by Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport gave the satisfaction for the tourists. b. Service Quality Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport has positive and significant effect on the tourism image. This means that with good service quality, the tourism image is likely to be positive, so this will be good for tourists and stakeholders. c. The tourism image and service quality of Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport have positive and significant effect on tourist loyalty. This means that good quality services along with a positive tourism image can increase tourists loyalty. d. The tourists satisfaction has positive and significant effect on tourism image. This means that the tourists satisfaction is one factor to create good and positive of tourism image, this should be maintained and enhanced. e. Tourists satisfaction has positive and significant effect on tourist loyalty. This means that the tourist satisfaction is a key element towards loyalty, it tourists if satisfied with his visit to an attraction, then they will do re-visit or recommend to others. www.ijmer.in
57
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
f.
Tourism image has positive and significant effect on loyalty through tourists satisfaction. This means that a positive image of tourism will be the trigger tourists loyalty to continue visiting.
g. Service quality Ngurah Rai International Bali Airport has positive and significant effect on tourist loyalty through tourism image. This means that good services quality will have an impact on the tourist loyalty, therefore the service quality should be improved and developed. 2. Recommendation Future studies are expected to examine the deeper is not limited to the variables that have been studied, but the need for the addition of other variables and is expected to use the scope of the broader research. In addition to advanced research is expected to develop existing analytical models to gain a more in-depth results. References 1. Al-Abneh, Mukhles. 2013. “Service Quality and its Impact on Tourist Satisfaction”. Interdisciplinary Journal Of Contemporary Research In Business, Vol. 4, No. 12, pp. 164-177. 2. Ali, Jihad Abu dan Howaidee, Majeda. 2012. “The Impact of Service Quality on Tourist Satisfaction in Jerash”. Interdisciplinary Journal Of Contemporary Research In Business, Vol. 3, No. 12, pp. 164-187. 3. Archana, R. dan Subha, M.V,. 2012. “A Study On Service Quality and Passenger Satisfaction On Indian Airlines”. International Journal of Multidisciplinary Research Vol. 2, Issue 2, February 2012, pp. 50-63. 4. Arief, Muhammad. 2008. “Kualitas Pelayanan Publik di Bandara Internasional Sultan Hasanuddin Makasar”. Jurnal Manajemen, Vol. 3, No. 2, hlm. 1-8. www.ijmer.in
58
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
5. Barnes, James G., 2003, Secrets of Customer Relationship Management (Rahasia Manajemen Hubungan Pelanggan, Yogyakarta: Andi Offset. 6. Coban, Suzan, 2012, “The Effects of the Image of Destination on Tourist Satisfaction and Loyalty: The Case of Cappadocia”, uropean Journal of Social Sciences, Vol.29, No.2 (2012), pp. 222-232. 7. Goonroos, C, 2009. Service Management and Marketing, Published by Jhon Wiley and Sons Ltd, England. 8. Graeff Judith A, dkk. 2006. Komunikasi Untuk Kesehatan dan Perubahan Perilaku, Yogyakarta: Gadjah Mada University Press. 9. Hossain, Mohammed Javed. 2012. “Impact of Service Quality on Customer Satisfaction: A Case of Tourism Industry in Bangladesh”. International Journal of Research in Finance & Marketing, Vol. 2, No. 2, pp. 1-25. 10. Jamal, Ahmad dan Goode, Mark M.H,. 2001. “Consumers and Brands: a Study Of The Impact Of Self-Image Congruence On Brand Preference and Satisfaction”. Journal Marketing Intelligence & Planning, Vol. 19, No. 7, pp. 482-492. 11. Konecnik, Maja. 2004. “Evaluating Slovenia’s image as a tourism destination: A self analysis process towards building a destination brand”. Journal of Brand Management, Vol. 11, No. 4, pp. 307-326. 12. Lamidi dan Marjam Desma Rahadhini. 2013. “Pengaruh Citra Objek Wisata Umbul Tlatar Boyolali Terhadap Loyalitas Pengunjung Dengan Kepuasan Sebagai Variabel Mediasi”. Jurnal Ekonomi dan Kewirausahaan, Vol. 13, No. 1, hlm. 58-68. 13. LeBlanc, Gaston dan Nguyen, Nha. 2001. ”Cues Used by Customers Evaluating Corporate Image in Service Firms”. International Journal of Service Industry Management, Vol 7, No. 2, pp. 44-56. 14. Lili Adi Wibowo dan Yeni Yuniawati, 2009, “The Influence of Tourist Product Attribute and Trust to Tourist Satisfaction and www.ijmer.in
59
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Loyalty A Study of Mini Vacation in Bandung”, Ringkasan Hasil Penelitian Dosen: Program Studi: Manajemen Pemasaran. 15. Martin-Cejas, Roberto Rendeiro, 2006. “Tourism Service Quality Begins at the Airport”. Jurnal Tourism Management. Vol. 27, pp. 874-877. 16. Meenaghan and Shipley. 2009. “Media Effect in Commercial Sponsorship”, European Journal of Marketing, Vol.33, No. 3/4, hlm. 328-347. 17. Nanang Tasunar. 2006. ”Kualitas Layanan Sebagai Strategi Menciptakan Kepuasan pada Pangkalan Pendaratan Ikan (PPI) Morodemak”. Jurnal Sains Pemasaran Indonesia, Vol. V, No. 1 Mei 2006, hlm. 41-62. 18. Parasuraman, dkk. 2009. Delivering Quality Service. New York: The Free Press. 19. Rahayu, Agus. 2014. “Pengaruh Atribut Produk Wisata Terhadap Kepuasan Wisatawan”. Trikonomika, Vol. 9, No. 2, hlm. 124–130. 20. Setyaningsih, Budiyarti Eko. 2010. “Pengaruh Kualitas Jasa Terhadap Kepuasan Penumpang Pesawat Terbang di Bandara Internasional Adi Soemarmo Surakarta”. Jurnal Ekonomi dan Manajemen, Vol. 1, No. 5, hlm. 23-45. 21. Sulistiyani, Endang. 2010. “Membangun Loyalitas Wisatawan Melalui Peningkatan Kualitas Obyek Wisata, Promosi dan Kepuasan Wisatawan di Kawasan Wisata Tawangmangu Karanganyar”. Jurnal Pengembangan Humaniora, Vol. 10, No. 3, hlm. 161-165. 22. Teck-Hua, Ho, Young-Hoon Park dan Zhou, Yong-Pin. 2005. “Incorporating Satisfaction into Customer Value Analysis: Optimal Investment in Lifetime Value”. Marketing Science, Vol. 2, No. 1, pp. 1-35.
www.ijmer.in
60
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
EFFORTS OF NGOs IN DEVELOPMENT OF SEXUALLY EXPLOITED WOMEN IN SOUTH INDIA Dr. Kumudini Achchi Assistant Professor Postgraduate Department of Social Work JSS College of Arts, Commerce and Science Mysore, Karnataka, India
Introduction: Sexual urege is one of the basic biological needs of any living beings, as such with human beings. The very act of fulfilling the natural biological need has turned into an exploitative situation which pushed females into an exploitative, pathetic condition. Such situation demanded social work intervention where NGOs are putting efforts to bring those women out from exploitatiove situation. The interventions of NGOs are in different areas such as rescue, procecution, rehabilitation, prevnetion, follow up, devleopmental, advocay, research. Out of all these activities, intervention in developmental areas become highly significanct as it focused on overall development of exploited women. Dimensions of developmental affects are found in different forms which vary from geographical area to another and from gender to gender. Being aware of this, and considering the same in development planning and action is known as practicing a ‘gender perspective’. This perspective acts very strongly with related to sexual exploitatation. Here the most exploited group is women. Developmental programmes are the programmes to develop the overall personality of survivors through activities such as enhancicng knowledge about their legal rights, creating awarenss about the special policies and programmes ment for them, motivating them to participate www.ijmer.in
61
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
in educational prgrammes etc,. These programmes developes the personality of the surviviors through shaping their thoughts, moulding thier perceptions, improving their communication skills, devloping courage to represent themselves infornt of the public etc., which makes thier mainstreaming goal more clear and easier. These type of developmental programmes are very much needed as it can be a weapon to fight against re-trafficking. That means to say if the individual is strong enough with the awarenss about their legal rights, having their own collectives, attending in various other developmental programme, the chances of re-trafficking can be reduced. Effective implementation of such devleopmental acitivites acts as a strong base for preventive concept. Once the survivors or the vulnerable groups gets empowered through developmental exposures, re-trafficking for sexual exploitation or for any other forms of explotiation becomes hard. Further, it helps the mainstreamed surviviors in mananging the situations that can disturb their social, mental and physical health. The developmental intervention assist these women in enhancing their knowledge about the available resources both internal and external, so that when situation demands, these women can approach the resource centres for their beterment. In this view, the developmental intervnetion beocmes hihgly significant in the field of human trafficking. The non governmental organisations in South India have already been adopted these developmental activities along with many other supportive interventions. Methodology: Keeping all these issue in focus, a study was conducted in South Indian states and Union Territory such as Karnataka, Tamil Nadu, Andhra Pradesh, Kerala and Pondicherry to understand the efforts of NGOs in empowering sexually exploited women. 22 selected NGOs were considered for the study who works for mainstreaming commercially sexually exploited women, without advocating legalization. www.ijmer.in
Two 62
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Management level representatives from each organization, mostly from top level management were interviewed for the study. Descriptive and diagnostic research design was adopted along with interview schedule as tool for collecting data. Statistically, simple descriptive and Contingency Co-efficient tests were adopted to analyse the collected data. Results: Table – 1: Frequency and percent responses for the statement “Development programmes adopted by NGOs” by respondents’ in different states: SL. NO 1 2
3
4
Developmental programmes adopted Awareness about legal rights Educating about special policies and programmes for their welfare Formation of their own associations Training for personality development
AP F 6 P 49.8% F 7 P F
KA
STATES TN
TOTAL PON
KL
1 12.5%
0 0%
0 0%
0 0%
7 21.7%
3
0
0
0
10
58.1%
37.5%
0%
0%
0%
31%
2
1
0
0
0
3
12.5% 0
0% 1
0% 0
0% 1
9.3% 2
0%
100%
0%
20%
6.3%
P 16.6% F 0 P 0%
CC=.571; P=.749 The baove table reveals 7 organistions concentrating on
creating
awareness about legal rights of the survivior which are essential to live in the mainstreamed society as the developmental programme. The awareness about legal rights specially with women in Indian context is too far from reality. The situation with women who are socioeconimically poor is still worse. In such condition, not only making them understand their legal rights assured by Indian constitution and judicial system but also making them to learn the way to enjoy those rights with the obligation of responsibilitties, change their perception www.ijmer.in
63
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
toward the society and empower them to present themselves logically in all situation. In this context the organisations are putting their efforts in developing the personalities of survivors. Another set of 7 organisations have recognised the improtance of educating the survivors about special policies and programmes for their welfare. In fact Government of India has recognized the problems of women in vulnerable conditions, though not the problem of survivors directly, and has provided with welfare measure to support them to cope up with situations. Women in vulnerable conditions are mostly illiterates or with less education. The chances of knowing the facilities available for them and utilizing the same among them are very less. In such situations, efforts in educating the survivors about available policies and programmes and also guiding and helping them in recognizing and utilizing such welfare schemes for their benefit has been the responsibility of these NGOs. A set of 3 organisations are working on forming the associations of survivors for their development. They are motivating the survivor to make use of their talents and skills acquired through vocational training for their own benefit. These collectives of survivors are involved in establishing their own business in various fields such as beauty salons, driving schools, cottage industries, smallscale industries etc., for which a transparent administration process is the base. These exercise is helpful in recognizing the survivors own strengths and weakness, improving the capacity of accepting the responsibilities proactively, being accountable for the happenings around etc., which enable them to act responsible in a social environment. This has been found very helpful and successful activity to develop personality of the survivors. Another kind of developmental activity adopted by two organisations is providing training for personality development. These organisations have periodic group discussion along with a group of survivors to enhance their selfdetermination and improvement of quality of life in the mainstreamed society. Certain topics which can motivate the survivors to be active in www.ijmer.in
64
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
preventive activities are picked up and discussed with survivors. Though not much result is seen in these activities, the NGOs are gaining insight about various kinds of requirements of the field to intervene in future days. In other words, such group discussions are triggering creative ideas in the staff of NGOs to implement in the fields such as rehabilitation and prevention. In sum, though reaching the goal under these activities is challenging, it is not impossible. It insists for lot of professional input from the organisations and if fulfilled, excellent result can be expected. Personality development is a vast area, which cannot be talked at surface level. For this reason, the two organisations who have adopted this activity in Tamilnadu and Kerala are found not receiving the good result. Instead, focus on specific field help better in achieving the goal. When the statistics applied, a non- significant association was observed between states and the developmental activities adopted by the organisations where contingency coefficient value of .571 fails to reach the significant level criterion of .05. In other wards, the types of developmental activities adopted by NGOs ate not of different kinds. Since a small number of NGOs have adopted this programme with less numbers of activities, a non-significant association if found.
www.ijmer.in
65
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Table – 2: Frequency and percent responses for the statement “Problems in organizing outreach programmes” by respondents: SL. NO
1
Difficulties in organizing outreach programmes Community noncooperation
2
Social Stigma
3
Caste System
4
Problem of place
5
Lack of funds
6
Lack of staff
7
Nothing
8
Not Applicable
AP F P F P F P F P F P F P F P F P
2 16.6% 6 50% 5 41.2% 2 16.6% 7 58.1% 1 8.3% 3 24.9% 0 0%
STATES KA TN
1 12.5% 3 37.5% 0 0% 0 0% 4 50% 0 0% 1 12.5% 3 37.5%
1 16.7% 1 16.7% 0 0% 1 16.7% 2 33.4% 0 0% 0 0% 3 50%
TOTAL PON
KL
0 0% 1 100% 0 0% 0 0% 1 100% 0 0% 0 0% 0 0%
0 0% 3 60% 0 0% 0 0% 3 60% 0 0% 0 0% 2 40%
4 12.4% 14 43.4% 5 15.5% 3 9.3% 17 52.7% 1 3.1% 4 12.5% 8 25%
CC=.741; P=.819 Working with community is not an easy task to anybody as the matter. In the line, the NGOs in organising community outreach programmes, must have undergoing certain difficulties. The study tried to identify the same and came to an understanding that four organiations have declared that community non-cooperation as the hurdle in implementing outreach programmes. In their experience, local politics, biased attitude of the public towards the issue are some of the reasons identified for the same situation. In otherwards, failure of picking up a proper mode of communication to the public interest can also contributing for the same. Apart form these reasons, one more reason identified by NGOs is the masked faced of the society. They express that majority of the people in the present society believes that prostitution is a necessary evil which protects the welfare of the society. www.ijmer.in
66
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
This belief makes them not to cooperate with preventive activities of NGOs. Social stigma is another problem identifies by 14 organistions which make the people not to be recieptive towards the programmes. As a result, the message is failing to reach the larger community as participation by the community get diluted. Caste system is the problem identified by 5 organisations in Andhra Pradesh. These organisations admits that problem of trafficking for comercial sexual exploitation is more felt in the rural community. According to these NGOs, majority of the sexually exploited women are from lower caste. This influence the other segment of the society to adopt apathetic attitude. This reduces the community participation which hinder prevention of women being in exploataitve situation. 3 organistions, out of which 2 organisations representing Andhra Pradesh and one organisation representing Tamilnadu share their experiece that few years back society was rejecting to accommodate the programme in their georaphical area. The community express its non-cooperation through not providing space/place to conduct such programme. The social stigma attached to the issue and minimum knolwedge of the public were creating this problem. In many cases, the space they get are not in the centre of the community or in the place where people can mobile easily, but there was no other go. Today, they are free from such problems, as learned people who provide space inspite of nonacceptance from the local people and also training centres are available to conduct the programmes which give relaxation from this problem. Funding is the major problem faced by 17 organisations. The reason behind this is the legalisation wave which is strong in the state demands more creative and sensistive programme for outreach programmes for which more economic resources are required. According to them, community outreach programme is one programme which demands more finanial resource, but the financial support are not available to the required level. One organistion from Andhra Pradesh has expressed the short of qualified staff in implementing www.ijmer.in
67
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
outreach programmes. In the expericnce of this organisation, the educationally qualified staff do not perform well in the community, as they have lot of reservation to get along with the community whereas average qualified people do not deliver the subject to the audience completely. This is where the NGO is facing the problem of qualified staff. Another set of 4 organisations have expressed that they have no problem in implementing outreah programmes. This statemet does not communicate that these NGOs are problem free, but such opinion reflect on the optimistic attitude of the organisations. Apart from this view, the problem faced by NGOs depends on time to time, region to region and also depends of the range of activities adopted in particular region. In any case, expressing no problem in implementing community out reach programme is a positive sign from the side of NGOs. Overall, funding problem exists as a major problem in implementing community outreach programmes in preventing sexual exploitation against women. This has been felt by NGOs because they have more creative programmes to implement where the financial support is hindering their enthhusiasm towads implementing it. Second largest problem recognised by the study is social stigma. NGOs have felt social stigma is hampering the qulity of results for their efforts in the community. The other problems recognied through the study are practice of caste system, community non-cooperation, problem of place and lack of qulified and committed staff to implement outreach programmes which are not hihg int heir frequency. 4 NGOs are enthusiastic to say they are facing no problems in implementing the programmes. This depends on the range of outreach programmes adopted by the organisations. When the statistics applied, a nonsignificant association was observed between states and the problems faced by the NGOs in implementing outreach programmes to prevent sexual violence against women where contingency coefficient value of www.ijmer.in
68
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
.741 fails to reach significant level criterion of .05. In other wards, the problems faced by NGOs in implementing outreach programmes are all the same Table – 3: Frequency and percent responses for the statement “The factors that influence the work directly” by respondents’ in different states: Sl. No. 1
2 3 4 5 6 7
Factors that direct influence the work Lack of cooperation from police Threatening from pimps Influence from Political people Biased attitude of the public Feelings of CSEW Social needs of the victims Other NGOs
STATES TN PON
TOTAL
AP
KA
KL
7 58.1%
3 37.5%
4 66.8%
1 100%
1 20%
16 49.6%
5 41.5% 2 16.6% 4 33.2% 0 0% 2 16.6% 0 0%
1 12.5% 1 12.5% 4 50% 0 0% 2 25% 1 12.5%
1 16.7% 2 33.4% 1 16.7% 0 0% 0 0% 0 0%
0 0% 0 0% 0 0% 0 0% 0 0% 0 0%
1 0% 0 0% 0 0% 3 0% 0 0% 0 0%
8 24.8% 5 15.5% 9 27.9% 3 9.4% 4 12.5% 1 3.1%
CC=.801; P=.172 In general, apart from the factors considered in the early part of the study in conducting various activities, there are lot more factors that influence the work of the NGOs and its effectiveness. The study intended to understand the same and attempt was made. The result of the attempt reveals that lack of cooperation from police has been highlighted by 16 organisations as major part which influences the quality work by NGOs. According to these NGOs, the non-cooperation of police occurs in each stage right from prosecution till rehabilitation and prevention, where efforts put in the process of mainstreaming do not giving expected results in majority of the cases. Further, they express that though such non-cooperation cannot be generalized with www.ijmer.in
69
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
all police officers, majority of them can be perceived in the line. Biased attitude of the public in accepting the mainstreamed survivors is the other major problem that is influencing the quality of work of NGOs. 9 organisations (27.9%) have identified this factor. According to these NGOs, majority of the public are still biased about the issue of prostitution and as a result, the concept of reunion with mainstreamed society has not been an easy task in the mainstreamed society. According to these organisations, the public have no much idea about exploitative situation the women undergo in the field, which makes them feel biased about their identity. Threatening from the pimps or mediators are the other major problem found by the study with 8 organisations. According to these organisations, since the intervention by NGOs affects the traffickers’ income and stability in the field, they threatens the life’s of the NGO staff, where many a times quality intervention gets delayed or affected. In the same line, political people intervene to support the traffickers, by advising NGOs either not to implement some programmes in particular areas or to not to touch some activities of particular traffickers. This has been experienced by 5 NGOs. Another three organisations have felt that feelings of survivors influence their work directly. Many a time, according to these NGOs, because of their psychological conditions and the influence of other NGOs who are working for legalisation of prostitution, loose their determination for rehabilitation. Another 4 organizations have expressed that meeting social needs of the victims such as meting relatives, finding life partners to them are the challenging factors that influence their work directly. Another one organisation express that the intervention of other NGOs to work for health care of the sexually exploited women is the factor which influence their work directly. According to this organisation, these organisations works for the promotion healthy life of these women through condom promotion indirectly motivate the exploited women to continue in the field. This is hampers the work of this NGOs. www.ijmer.in
70
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Overall, lack of cooperation from police, biased attitude of the public to accept the rehabilitated women, threatening to the organisations staff from the pimps/mediators are the major factors found by the study that are directly affecting the influence of work. Otherwise, influence of the political people to safeguard the traffickers, fulfilling the needs of the victims, the intervention of other organisations in the name of health promotion are some of the other factors identified by the NGOs during the study. When the statistics applied, a non- significant association was observed between states and the identified factors which influence their work directly, where contingency coefficient value of .801 failed to reach the significant level criterion of .05. In other wards, the identified factors which influence the work are statistically same. Table – 4: Frequency and percent responses for the statement “Criteria adopted to assess the success by the organisations” by respondents’: SL. NO
1 2
3
4
5
6
Criteria to assess programme effectiveness Interview of beneficiaries Comparing the organisation target and achievement Number of successful mainstreaming Assessment of economic status of rehabilitated CSEW Assessment of social status of rehabilitated CSEW Assessment of quality of life
www.ijmer.in
F P F P
F P F P
F P
F P
STATES TN
PON
KL
3 37.5% 2
2 33.3% 5
1 100% 1
0 0% 1
13 40.3% 14
41.5%
25%
83.5%
100%
20%
43.4%
8
1
2
0
0
11
66.4%
12.5%
33.4%
0%
0%
34.1%
1
0
0
0
1
2
8.3%
0%
0%
0%
20%
6.2%
1
2
1
0
1
5
8.3%
25%
16.7%
0%
20%
15.5%
2 16.6%
3 37.5%
0 0%
0 0%
1 20%
6 18.6%
AP
KA
7 58.1% 5
TOTAL
71
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
7 8 9
style of rehabilitated CSEW Feedback of the field workers Feedback from the public No such criteria adopted
F P F P F P
2 16.6% 1 8.3% 2 16.6%
0 0% 0 0% 1 12.5%
0 0% 0 0% 1 16.7%
0 0% 0 0% 0 0%
1 20% 0 0% 2 40%
3 9.3% 1 3.1% 6 18.6%
CC=.818; P=.585 Personal assessment or self-evaluation is hardest task to any individuals. The exercise of self - assessment and acceptance of drawbacks are the milestones for development. In this view, an attempt was made to understand the criteria adopted by NGOs to assess the effectiveness of different programmes adopted by them and the study reveals 13 organisations have expressed that they have considered interviews with the beneficiaries as the criteria to understand the effectiveness of their intervention in the field. According to them, periodic interview with beneficiaries to certain period till the need for follow-up exists, gathering information about their level of satisfaction towards the mainstreamed lifestyle, the quality of life style adopted, the socio-economic status achieved etc., gives the quality of intervention of NGOs and such information provides qualitative feedback to the organisations which are helpful in improving their quality intervention. They believe that the information directly from survivors can give more insight than from any other sources. In this regard, they have adopted this measure. Another set of 14 organisations have expressed that they compare their targets against the achievements and finds out the gap exists. According to these NGOs, the recognized gap between targets and achievements communicates the areas which needs intervention and the organisations are intervening in such area for further development. Another set of 11 organisations depends on the number of successfully rehabilitated women as the criterion for assessment. Here successful www.ijmer.in
72
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
rehabilitation refers to the mental preparedness and socio-economic status of the survivors for reintegration into mainstreamed community through either family reunion, marriage or through preparing for an independent life by achieving economic empowerment. According to these organisations, they learn from failure as well as success of each attempt for mainstreaming. Another two organisations disclosed economic status the mainstreamed survivor as the criterion to assess their quality of intervention as economic empowerment is the important factor to focus in the process of mainstreaming. These organisations believe that if the survivors are secured in financial matter then chances of re-trafficking decreases and confidence about independent living increases which is essential in mainstreaming. With this best interest, these organisations have adopted the criterion. Another set of 5 organisations have adopted the socials status gained by the survivors in the community as their criterion to assess their intervention. The NGOs have considered the importance of social status to live in the mainstreamed society and ensures good social status for the successful mainstreaming. According to them, the social status refers to gaining the social acceptance to rehabilitated life style which creates feelings in the survivors as one among the community, survivors’ comfortableness in the mainstreamed life style etc. The organisations consider these factors which influence the mental health of the people and if the survivors achieve it, it should be symbol of healthy and successful mainstreaming. 6 other organisations are assessing the quality of life style adopted by rehabilitated survivors as the criterion to assessment. According to these NGOs, quality of life style adopted by the survivors represent their standard of life. For instances, the kind of job through which they earn their daily bread, their means to spend the leisure time, free from alcohol dependency etc. Another three organisations have recognized the feedback of field workers as their criterion. The field workers generally follow up the survivors in the community either face to face or behind the screen and www.ijmer.in
73
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
reports back to the organisation about the quality of life lead by the survivors, the community response to their mainstreamed style of life, the capacity of the survivors to cope up with everyday situations and their skill at managing social evils and bird view of trafficker etc., which provides information about quality of life lead by the survivors. The NGOs believes that this exercise gives the correct picture about the quality of intervention and the gap existed are considered for betterment. There is only one organisation recognized at Andhra Pradesh who also receives feedback from public about the quality of intervention of the organisation and their perception about the life led by the survivors in the mainstreamed community etc. This NGO admits that this criterion is one among others interventions, they feel involvement of public in all level of intervention is important. They understand the need of public involvement from stage of rescue till the stage of mainstreaming where these survivors have to live their life with public acceptance. In this regard, they involve public who have concern about survivors and their welfare. The concept of public involvement is very much acceptable but the influence of stigma with the society has to be considered seriously before consulting the public. The NGO has expressed the sensitiveness towards selecting the people which is more positive and optimistic, in which condition the criterion results in better way. There are 6 organisations admitting no criteria to assess their effectiveness. It is quite alarming that the organisations have no attempt to find out the gaps that are existed with the system followed by the organisation in implementing the programmes. Selfassessment is an important exercise all the organisations have to adopt as the very field is sensitive and work the NGOs involved are very threatening and delicate. With regard to government involvement in evaluating the government projects undertaken by the NGOs, periodical evaluation has been conducted by the concerned department about the quality of service www.ijmer.in
74
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
extended by NGOs. The government representatives expresses that there are very less number of NGOs in the states who have direct objectives for mainstreaming commercially sexually exploited women when compared to the need exist in the society but their contribution to the community is considerable. Further they ad that NGOs are providing more service to the community than the support they are getting from the governments. Overall, comparing the organisation’s target against achievement and interviewing the beneficiaries are found most adopted mode by the NGOs to assess the effectiveness of their programmes. The numbers of rehabilitation and mainstreaming are also reflects on the results of few NGOs. It does not mean that one mode has been adopted by the NGO but multiple modes have been adopted by the NGOs. Apart from these, quality of mainstreamed life style of the survivors also reflects the effectiveness of the NGOs. When the statistics applied, a nonsignificant association was observed between states and the modes adopted for assessing the effectiveness of the NGO programmes where contingency coefficient value of .818 fails to reach the significant level criterion of .05. In other wards, the criteria adopted to assess the success by the organisations are not of different kinds. Conclusion: The developmental activities to mainstream the victims of human trafficking for sexual exploitation as become highly significant as it empower the women in vulnerable condition in all the dimension such as social, economical, legal, political etc. The NGOs working for the same issues have adopted intervention in this dimension which has been focused in the paper. Though reaching the goal under these activities is challenging, it is found not impossible. It insists for lot of professional input from the organisations and if fulfilled, excellent result can be expected. Personality development is a vast area, which
www.ijmer.in
75
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
cannot be talked at surface level. For this reason, the two organisations who have adopted this activity in Tamilnadu and Kerala are found not receiving the good result. Instead, focus on specific field help better in achieving the goal. While looking into the problems encountered by the NGOs, funding problem exists as a major one as these NGOs are willing to have more creative programmes. Second largest problem recognised by the study is social stigma. The other problems recognied through the study are practice of caste system, community non-cooperation, problem of place and lack of qulified and committed staff to implement outreach programmes which are not high in their frequency. 4 NGOs are enthusiastic to say they are facing no problems in implementing the programmes. Otherwise, lack of cooperation from police, biased attitude of the public to accept the rehabilitated women, threatening to the organisations staff from the pimps/mediators are the major factors found by the study that are directly affecting the influence of work. When compared to the organisation’s target against achievement and interviewing the beneficiaries are found most adopted mode by the NGOs to assess the effectiveness of their programmes. The numbers of rehabilitation and mainstreaming are also reflects on the results of few NGOs. It does not mean that one mode has been adopted by the NGO but multiple modes have been adopted by the NGOs. When the service against requirements are considered, the study reveal that more and more developmental programmes have to be adopted by the NGOs working for mainstreaming commercially sexually exploited women which directly results in prevention of the problems. Reference: 1. Achchi Kumudini (2010), A Study on the role of NGOS in mainstreaming commercially sexually exploited women in South India”, Ph.D. Thesis, University of Mysore, Mysuru.
www.ijmer.in
76
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
2. Nair P.M. (2005) Trafficking in Women and Children in India, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd., Hyderabad. 3. Childline India Foundation (2003), “Child Trafficking – Issues and Concerns”, Mumbai. 4. “Minds of the Survivor” (2004), A Report on Mental Health Interventions for Survivors of Trafficking in South Asia, A Capacity Building Process and A Service Delivery Model. 5. Monzini Paola (2006), “Sex Traffic – Prostitution, Crime and Exploitation”, Books for Change, Bangalore. 6.
Mukherji, K K; Mukherji, S (2007) “Girls and women in prostitution in India”, Development, New Delhi.
www.ijmer.in
Department
of
Women
and
Child
77
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT IN KERALA: PROBLEMS AND PROSPECTS Dr. Nithya N.R. Assistant Professor PG& Research Department of Political Science Sree Kerala Varma College, Thrissur Introduction Municipal Solid waste management (MSWM) constitutes a serious problem in many third world cities. This is largely because of rapid population growth and economic development in the country. Over the next several decades, globalization, rapid urbanization and economic growth in the developing world tend to further deteriorate this situation. This trend can be ascribed to our changing lifestyles, food habits, and change in living standards. Urbanization changes the nature of solid waste management from mainly a low priority, localized issue to an internationally pervasive social problem. The key urban environmental challenges in the Asian region are: water pollution, air pollution, solid waste management and inappropriate land use. Solid wastes are produced in daily life due to the various activities of human beings, animals and plants. The majority of substances composing municipal solid waste include paper, vegetable matter, plastics, metals, textiles, rubber and glass. The urban environment in Kerala is highly unhygienic with stagnant and contaminated water bodies, accumulation of degradable discards and litter, poor drains, pollutes air and high level of noise. It is observed that lack of financial resources, institutional weakness, improper selection of technology, transportation systems and disposal options, public’s apathy towards environmental cleanliness and sanitation have made this service unsatisfactory.
www.ijmer.in
78
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Defining Waste The term solid waste is very broad. It not only includes the traditional non hazardous solid waste, such as municipal garbage, but also hazardous solid waste. We can define solid waste as garbage refuse, sludge, and other discarded materials. According to United Nations Environmental Programmee ‘wastes are substances or objects, which are disposed of or are intended to be disposed of or are required to be disposed of by the provisions of national law’. World Health organization defines waste as ‘every substance or object arising from human or animal activities that has to be discarded as useless or unwanted’. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA) defines ‘solid waste to include, garbage, refuse, sludge from municipal sewage treatment plants, ash from solid waste incinerators, mining waste, waste from construction and demolition and some hazardous wastes’. Theories of Waste Management a. Zero Waste Theory The first official use of the term ‘zero waste’ was in 1973 by Paul Palmer. It is a fundamental design principle that maximizes efficiency and prevents waste to address resource sustainability and other environmental detriments related to waste such as pollution and climate change. According to this theory, zero waste would maximize recycling, minimize waste, reduce consumption and ensure that products are made to be reused, repaired or recycled back into nature or the market place. This theory recognizes that there are various institutional and ideological barriers preventing the establishment of genuine zero waste practices. The elements of this theory can be followed by an analysis of San Francisco’s operationalization of zero waste through extensive recycling and compost programs and bans on plastic bags (Ferrell, 2002).1 www.ijmer.in
79
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
b. Design Theory of waste management This theory has been introduced to channel environmental sciences into engineering design. It is a unified body of knowledge about waste and waste management. It is an effort to organize the diverse variables of the waste management system as it stands today. c. The Theory of Waste Management The theory of waste management is a body of knowledge about waste and waste management and it is founded on the expectation that waste management is to prevent waste to cause harm to human health and the environment and promote resource optimization. This theory could be based on the following considerations • Waste management is to prevent waste causing harm to human health and the environment. • The primary aim of waste is the conservation of resources. • By applying waste management, we shall avoid loss of resources and prevent waste from being produced by creating useful products primarily. • The role of waste management is to turn waste into non-waste (Pongracz, 2002).2 Solid Waste Management in Developed
and
Developing
Countries The production of municipal solid waste is an inevitable consequence of human activity, and its management directly impacts the health of the people and environment surrounding it (Vergara, 2012).3 The management of solid waste is one of the challenges facing any urban area in the world. Profound differences exist between industrialized and developing countries in terms of income, standard of living, consumption pattern, institutional capacity and capital available www.ijmer.in
80
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
for urban investments. Industrialized countries enjoy a relative abundance of capital and have high labour costs, while developing countries have a relative scarcity of capital and an abundance of unskilled and inexpensive labour. The physical characteristics of cities in developing and industrialized countries differ markedly. Third world counties have extensive areas with substandard conditions and slums with narrow and unpaved streets. Waste generated in developing countries contains a large percentage of organic materials, usually three times higher than that of industrialized countries. Waste is also more dense and humid, due to prevalent consumption of fresh and vegetables, as well as unpacked foods. First world residents consume more processed food packaged in cans, bottles, jars and plastic containers than in developing world. As a result, waste generated in the former contains more packaging materials than that in that of the latter (Emily).4 There are several factors that set MSW management in developing countries apart from that in industrialized countries. The types of materials that compose the majority of the waste are different. In developing countries, there is much higher proportion of organics, and considerably less plastics. The larger amount of organic material makes the waste denser, with greater moisture and smaller particle size. Another difference is that technologies used in industrialized countries are often inappropriate for developing countries. Developing countries cities are characterized by unplanned, haphazardly constructed, sprawling slums with narrow roads that are inaccessible to collection vehicles. There has been an increase in solid waste generation due to changes in lifestyle during the last 50 years. The increase in nuclear families causes less bulk purchasing and more products packaged in small-serving portion.5 This accelerates the rate of after consumption waste.
www.ijmer.in
81
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Types of Solid Waste Waste can be classified on the basis of its origin, composition, physical aspects, chemical or hazardous properties and preferred method of disposal. 1. Municipal solid waste The generation of Municipal solid waste is relatively insensitive to variations in per capita income. The principal sources of solid wastes are domestic, commercial, industrial and agricultural activities. Many times domestic and commercial wastes are wrongly categorized as the so called urban waste. According to EPA, the United States produces 11 billion tons of solid waste each year. According to World Bank study the urban areas of Asia produce about 0.76 million tones of municipal solid waste per day. In India, the volume of waste is on the rise, as economic growth drives more and more people from the rural hinterland to the urban areas, spawning newer consumption patterns and social linkages (David,1995).6 2. Bio- medical waste B w means any waste, which is generated during the diagnosis, treatment or immunization of human being or animals or in research activities pertaining thereto or in the production or testing of biological. It includes human anatomical waste, animal waste, microbiology and biotechnology waste, waste sharps, discarded medicine and cytotoxic drugs, soiled waste, liquid waste, incineration and chemical waste. Every year, large quantities of hazardous wastes are produced by hospitals and other health care and research facilities in India (Ministry of Environment and Forestry, 1998).7 3. Hazardous waste The sources of hazardous waste include those from industrial processes, mining extraction, tailing from pesticide based agricultural www.ijmer.in
82
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
practices etc. according to Central Pollution Control Board, around 7.3 million tons of hazardous wastes is generated in the country of which 1.6 million tons in recyclable (Teri, 2003).8 4. E-waste E-waste is relatively newer, but deadlier, addition to the waste flock. It is now considered to be the fastest growing component of the MSW, making up 6% of the all waste streams. Import of E-waste has further complicated the problem. According to a survey, about 80% of the e-waste generated in the United States is exported to India, china and Pakistan.9 Compared to conventional municipal wastes, certain components of electronic products contain toxic substances, which can generate a threat to the environment as well as to human health. For instance, television and computer monitors normally contain hazardous materials such as lead, mercury, and cadmium, while nickel, beryllium, and zinc can often be found in circuit boards. Due to the presence of these substances, recycling and disposal of ewaste becomes an important issue (Bhutta, 2011).10 Profile of Kerala The total area of Kerala is 38863sq.km. Of which the net area sown is 2040.1sq.km. The population of the state is around 30 million, so much so, the per capita cultivated land is only about 0.08 ha. The land of Kerala comprises the narrow coastal strip bounded by the Western Ghats in the east and the Arabian sea in the west. Kerala has had a vibrant history springing from the ancient times, flowing down the medieval running to present. Modern Kerala came into being on 1st November 1956, by amalgamating the states of Travancore, Cochin and Malabar in the basis of the State Reorganization Act (Gopa, 2013)11. Kerala has attracted worldwide attention for its high human development indicators (HDIs) in a low economic growth context, and a fair amount of development literature has grown around the ‘Kerala www.ijmer.in
83
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
model’. The population distribution of Kerala according to religion is about 56.20% Hindus, 24.7 % Muslims and 19% Christians. At present this state is administratively divided into 14 districts, Which in turn are divided into 63 Taluks, 152 Blocks, 1532 Villages, 978 Grama (village) Panchayats, 53 Municipalities and 5 Corporation (Census – 2011). Table 1 Kerala: Population and General Data Category
Percentage
Area (in Sq. km)
38,863
Males
16,021,290 Person
Females
17,366,387 Person
Literacy
93.91 %
Hindus
56.20
Muslims
24.7
Christians
19
Others
0.1
SC
9.8
ST
1.1
Rural Kerala
52.28 %
Urban Kerala
47.72 %
Parliament Constituencies
20
Assembly constituencies
140
Source: Department of Information and Public Relations, Government of Kerala.
www.ijmer.in
84
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Solid Waste Management Scenario in Kerala The average number of dwellings per sq.km is about 110. Compared to the national average, one unit of the land has to produce 3.6 times more food and biological mass. Increase in population coupled with rapid urbanization and industrialization and consumerism, without due regard to environmental considerations, have led to extensive pollution of air, water and land. The urban environment in Kerala is highly unhygienic with stagnant and contaminated water bodies, accumulation of degradable discards and litter, poor drains, polluted air and high level of noise (The Financial Express, 2005).12 Though there are several agencies engaging in environmental management, lack of coordination and net working is a real concern. According to 2011 census the urban population of Kerala accounted for 47.72 per cent of the total population of the state distributed in 17 urban agglomerations and 81 towns. All these urban centers together covered only 9.35% of the total geographical area of the state. The growth rate in urban population is a significant phenomenon. Table 2 Urban Population and Urban Area in Kerala by Decades 1901-2011 Year
www.ijmer.in
% of Urban Population
Urban growth rate in per cent over the decade
Number of Towns
1901 7.1
0
21
1911 7.3
1.54
27
1921 8.7
2.98
44
1931 9.6
3.46
53
1941 10.8
3.5
62
1951 13.5
5.27
94 85
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
1961 15.1
3.99
92
1971 16.2
3.57
88
1981 18.8
3.75
106
1991 26.4
6.9
197
2001 26
7.7
98
2011 47.72
83.82
520
Source: Census of India, Various Years, Government of India, New Delhi Expansion of cultivation, development of transport facilities, population growth etc are some of the factors which actuated the process of urbanization in Kerala in the latter half of the 19th century. Reasons for the Rise of Waste Generation in Kerala (i)
Increasing urbanization: The Census 2011 figures indicate that 47.7 percent of Kerala is urbanized. This is on par with global figures. The trend of urbanization in the state is also different from that in the rest of the country. There is an urban-rural continuum with even the rural areas displaying distinct urban characteristics like high population densities and composite primary and tertiary occupation structures. Higher the urban population, the greater the amount of wastes that are generated.
(ii)
Changing Lifestyles: Rising disposable incomes have led to a change in values. The use-and-throw culture is now more pronounced. There is also the insidious presence of plastic in our lives. It’s not just plastic bags that are the problem. Food, water, phones, computers – almost everything we use in our daily lives uses plastic in some form or the other. This just increases the problems of disposal, as the current composting and recycling rates in India are hardly encouraging.
www.ijmer.in
86
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
(iii)
Growth in Tourism: While tourism is a major revenue earner for Kerala, there is a serious flip side too. The United Nations Environment Programme states, “In areas with high concentrations of tourist activities and appealing natural attractions, waste disposal is a serious problem and improper disposal can be a major despoiler of the natural environment – rivers, scenic areas, and roadsides. Solid waste and littering can degrade the physical appearance of the water and shoreline and cause the death of marine animals.” The Kerala government has been taking steps to address this issue with its Kerala – Waste Free Destination Campaign. However, much more needs to be done to educate both the tourists as well as the tourism industry (Rekha and Asim, 2005).13
Urban Problems in Kerala Urban India generates about 42 million tons of unsegregated solid waste annually, amounting to about 305 grams per capita per day, and varying across cities and towns from 200 grams to 600 grams. Environmental quality is an important determinant in human health. Deteriorating environmental conditions are major contributory factors to poor health and quality of life that hinder sustainable development. Though the health status of Kerala is comparatively far better compared to other Indian states, Kerala still ails in the health front. One out of every thousand people in Kerala are morbid due to any of the illness prevalence and urban Kerala records the highest male morbidity rate of 185 per thousand population in India. Other health problems include obesity, chronic disease etc. since the 1980s, Kerala has had a series of outbreaks of new diseases such as leptospirosis, dengue, Japanese encephalitis and chikungunya. The spread of new diseases seals the state of affairs in the public health care system in the state. Urban air pollution has been growing since the industrial revolution. There is clear link between respiratory diseases and the www.ijmer.in
87
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
levels of particular matter in the air. Ever increasing use of fossil fuel in the transportation and industrial sector is adversely affecting the air quality of Kerala (Kerala State Planning Board, 2007).14 Industrial area also account for almost half of the air polluting industries in Kerala. Kerala has a diverse land use and cropping pattern. There has been significant change in land use over the years. Over the last two decades, there is a decline in agricultural land use and a sharp decline in the size of land holding. Land use changes are manifested generally, as change in cropping pattern, quarrying, slope modification, soil excavation, conversion of paddy fields and swampy areas and filling wetlands etc. such changes affect the environment adversely by way of intense soil erosion, water logging, water scarcity, mono cropping and loss of biodiversity. Infrastructural development in the form of roads, railways, and other lines of communication fragmented the contiguity of the wetlands, and destroyed extensive tracts of coastal vegetation thereby upsetting the entire complex ecology. A substantial proportion of ill health in Kerala can be attributed to lack of safe drinking water. The major water quality problem associated with rivers of Kerala is bacteriological. The assessment of river such as Chalakkudy, Periyar, Muvatttupuzha, Meenachil, Pamba and Achankovil indicate major quality problems due to bacteriological pollution (Government of Kerala, 2007).15 The rapid growth of population in urban centers led to a great extent to the emergence and growth of urban slums in Kerala. Kerala has the lowest proportion of slum population as compared to the total population in India. Solid Waste Management Problems in Kerala Waste materials generated by activities connected with the market, agriculture, industry and households have become a major public health hazard in Kerala. Consequent to the directions made by the Supreme Court, the centre had enacted the municipal solid waste Rules, 2000 and the same has been implemented in Kerala. www.ijmer.in
88
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Management of waste involves purposeful and systematic control of the generation, storage, collection, transport, processing and disposal of these misplaced resources. Kerala have three cities that have populations above five lakh. These cities generate wastes in the range of 400- 450 tons per day (V.R. Reghunandanan, 2007).16 Some of the key issues related to the solid waste management in Kerala are absence of the process of segregation and storage of waste, inadequate equipped primary collection pints, multiple handling of waste at different stages, irregular street sweeping, use of open grounds as secondary collection points, use of unconventional type of vehicles, crude waste dumping in land fill sites, lack of community participation, weak institutional structure and insufficient funds. The whole landscape of Kerala is dotted with garbage hotspots. Kelugudde, Seethangoli and Kollangana in Kasargod; Pettippalam and Chelora in Kannur; Njeliyaparamba in Kozhikode; Pirivusala in Palakkad; Lalur in Thrissur; Chakkukandam in Guruvayur; Brahmapuram in Ernakulam; Vadavathur in Kottayam; Fathimapuram near Changanassery; Kanaathupaara; near pala; Kozhenchery in Pathanamthitta; Kureepuzha in Kollam and Vilappilsala in Thiruvananthapuram are but a few of these hotspots where local resistance movements have sprung up against indiscriminate dumping of solid waste, including plastic and e-waste, the product of Kerala’s relentless march towards urbanization. The state’s idea of waste management all these years has had to do with identification of a spot some distance away from urban centers and dumping of all the garbage there. All these places have now become flashpoints of struggle by people in their neighborhood who are no longer ready to bear the burden of waste generated by urban agglomerations. The maximum amount of solid waste comes from domestic waste followed by Hotels, marriage halls and institutions and other contributors followed by shops and markets etc (Malinya Mukta www.ijmer.in
89
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Keralam-Action Plan, 2007).17 The below figure shows the proportion of waste originated from different sources. Figure 1 Solid waste in Urban Kerala
Source: Malinya Mukta Keralam-Action Plan (2007). p.8. With regard to the physical composition of the solid waste in Kerala, biodegradables constitute about 71-83% of the total waste generated in the state. Paper constitute 3.5-5%, plastic, rubber, glass, metal includes 5-9% and inerts, earth, domestic hazardous constitute 4.9-11.5% of the total solid waste in Kerala.
www.ijmer.in
90
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Figure 2 Composition of solid waste in Kerala
Source: Malinya Mukta Keralam-Action Plan (2007), Government of Kerala The problem of solid waste management especially in urban Kerala is critical. In Kerala 25% of the population suffers from environment related problems (Local Self Government Department, 2007).18 Kerala has large number of health care institutions including hospitals, primary health centers, clinical laboratories, blood banks, nursing homes and dispensaries. Major portion of biomedical waste is contributed by the hospitals. There were several complaints about the accumulation f hazardous waste in Kozhikode, Thrissur and Alappuzha medical colleges. For the disposal of wastes, open dumping is the usual method followed by most of the local bodies (Rao and Rayal 2004).19 www.ijmer.in
91
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Per capita generation of wastes in Local Self Governments in Kerala is higher than those in other States due to the peculiar consumption pattern in the State. Primary collection is limited to urban Local Self Governments. Storage of waste at source is limited to a few cities and towns. Plastic wastes and e-wastes are on the increase. The Kudumbasree, a voluntary agency is assisting all local bodies for the house-to-house collection of municipal solid waste and transportation of waste. At present, urban bodies in Kerala spend 30% of their revenue for solid waste management. The most important techniques available for solid waste treatment are source reduction programmes, recycling, composting, converting waste to energy and land filling. Many of the cities are overflowing with population and there is very little space available within the city limits for the disposal of wastes which it generates. As part of the 74th constitutional amendment waste management has become the responsibility of the ULBs. Poor and unscientific management practices and inadequate finances has resulted in a situation that invited people protest. Government Initiatives for Solid Waste Management Realizing the gravity of the situation in recent times, the government of Kerala has initiated a number of programmes for managing the urban solid waste. The decentralization experiment in Kerala is a genuine attempt at planning from below through people’s participation. People’s plan (Peoples’ Plan Campaign) in the IX five year plans begins in 2007, has been restructured to focus on specific issues. Along with water shed management sanitation has been given the highest priority. The Clean Kerala Mission commenced functioning on a full time basis since 2004. It aims at establishing socially acceptable,
technically
feasible,
operationally
sustainable
and
financially viable solid waste management facilities and services. The Malinya Mukta Keralam campaign was launched on Gandhi Jayanthi day in 2006. This campaign has succeeded in creating the right www.ijmer.in
92
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
environment for a mission mode action plan to achieve the goal of clean Kerala. The focus was on cleaning of public institutions like schools, hospitals and Anganwadis, cleaning of markets and awareness building among self help groups. Kerala Sustainable Urban Development project is an Asian Development Bank assisted project. The objective of the project is to improve urban environment, economy, and living conditions for people living in five project cities under the project. A study of the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) identified the following priority areas for solid waste management. 1. Utilization of solid waste for resource recovery. 2. Selection of proper sites for waste disposal. 3. Application of appropriate technology for solid waste management. (a) Proper design of landfills and (b) incineration of garbage for power generation. 4. Greater use of solid waste for anaerobic digestion/biogas generation, composting etc. 5. Use of solid waste for fuel purpose. 6. Recycling of paper, plastic, glass, battery, waste etc.20 Conclusion and Suggestions Solid waste management is becoming a major public health and environmental concern in many countries. Rising quality of life and high rates of resource consumption patterns have unintended and negative impact on the urban environment. Many villages in Kerala can be considered urbanized villages. The municipalities in Kerala are overgrown panchayats and in terms of life style and physical growth parameters the difference between the two are narrow and decreasing. Political rivalry and social indifference have worsened the waste management crisis in Kerala. The collection system in Kerala is ill www.ijmer.in
93
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
planned, misused and in certain cases underutilized. Despite the periodic removal of waste, public roads remain unhygienic. Some of the suggestions for waste management are: Urban local bodies may arrange for the collection of domestic waste from the doorstep or from the community bin on a daily basis, promote educational campaigns for minimization of waste through the 4Rs principle (reduce, reuse, recycle and recover), proper execution of projects, proper support should be given to the NGOs and other organizations to involve actively in solving the nation’s E- waste problems and also revamp laws regarding its disposal and declare all solid waste disposal sites as pollution sources. Waste management practices in the state of Kerala have to be modified based on the recent advancements in the fields of science and technology. Biotechnology and Management principles has to go hands in hands to find proper remedy to solve any of the concern that is capable of disturbing the state’s natural heritage. References 1. Ferrell, John, (2002), George Washington Carver and Henry Ford; http://www.zerowaste.org/publications/PIONEERS.PDF, accessed on 06.02.15 at 7pm. 2. Martin Medina, Globalization, Development and Municipal Solid Waste Management in Third World Cities, http://www.gdnet.o rg, accessed on 06.04.15 at 3pm. 3. Vergara, S., and Tchobanoglous, G. (2012), Municipal Solid Waste and Environment: A Global Perspective. Rev. Environ. Annual Resour. 37, pp.277-309. 4. Emily walling, Alissa Watston et.al, Municipal Solid Waste Management in Developing Countries, htp://www.dnr.corne ll.ed u, a ccessed on 19.03.15 at 11 am. 5. Ibid. www.ijmer.in
94
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
6. David N Beede and David E Bloom (1995), The Economics of Municipal Solid Waste, The World Bank Research Observer,Vol.10,Issue: 2, August, p.117. 7. Ministry of Environment and Forestry, Bio Medical Waste Rules, 1998, Government of India, Schedule1. 8. Teri (2003), Hazardous Waste Management in India, A Policy Discussion Forum Base Paper, p.2. 9. Bhutta KS, Adnam O, Xia Ozhe Y. Electronic waste: a growing concern in today’s environment. Economics Research International; 2011. Article ID 474230, http:// dx.doi .org/1 0.1151/2011/474230, accessed on 01.07.15 at 6pm. 10. The Financial Express, E-waste: A Wiser Approach, November 14, 2005. 11. G. Gopa Kumar (2013), Civil Society-Politics Interface: The Kerala Experience, Manak Publishers, New Delhi, p.60. 12. http://www.universalecoservices.com/wastemanagement_in_ker ala.cfm, accessed on 09.06.15 at 10pm. 13. Rekha Kashyap, Asim Saha (2005), National Environment Health Profile and Comparative Health Risk Assessment, National Institute of Occupational Health, Ahmadabad, p.1. 14. Kerala State Planning Board
(2007),
Economic Review,
Government of Kerala, p.187. 15. Government of Kerala (2007), Kerala Housing and Habitat Policy-2007, Trivandrum, pp.31-32. 16. V.R. Reghunandanan (2007), Solid Waste Management: Promoting Waste Treatment Initiatives in Local Self Government Institutions in Kerala through Technology Adaptation and
www.ijmer.in
95
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Transfer, Kerala Research Programmee Development, CDS, Discussion Paper 97.
on
Local
Level
17. Malinya Mukta Keralam-Action Plan (2007), Source Book on Solid Waste Management, Local Self Government Department, Government of Kerala, June, p.10. 18. Local Self Government Department (2007), Malinyamukta Keralam (Waste Free Kerala) Action Plan, Government of Kerala, p.9. 19. S.K.M. Rao R.K. Rayal (2004), Biomedical Waste Management: An Infrastructural Survey of Hospitals, Medical Journal of Armed Forces of India, Vol.60, Issue.4, pp.379-382. 20. http://cpcb.nic.in, accessed on 11.03.15 at 5 pm.
www.ijmer.in
96
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
EFFECTIVENESS OF E-LEARNING MODULES IN MATHEMATICS AT THE HIGHER SECONDARY LEVEL Dr. S. Leo Stanly Associate Professor Pope John Paul II College of Education Pondicherry
INTRODUCTION In the present scientific and technological age, conventional teaching methods are not sufficient to arouse interest among students, and they do not meet the intellectual, psychological, and emotional needs of the students in the new millennium. Computers have become an integral part- of our lives. ICT has opened new avenues, like Online Learning, E-learning, Virtual University, e-coaching, e-education, ejournal, etc. It has provided an opportunity for the learner to use a maximum number of senses to get information. It has broken monotony and provided variety in the teaching – learning situation. The former United Nations Secretary-general Kofi Annan stated that, "If harnessed properly, Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs) have the potential to improve all aspects of our social, economic and cultural life. ICTs can serve as an engine for development in the twenty-first-century". Teachers can use computers to create instructional materials, slideshows, videotapes, worksheets, tests, bulletin board materials, rewards, incentives, games, and displays. UNESCO considered Information Technology as “Scientific, technological and engineering disciplines and management techniques used in information handling and processing, their application, computers and their interaction with men and machines, and associated social , economical and cultural matters.” Learning has to be www.ijmer.in
97
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
appreciated as a participatory process that takes place in a shared social context of the learner’s immediate peers as well as the wider social community (NCERT, 2005). Much of our school learning is still individual based (NCERT, 2005) and traditionally trusted tools of learning are inadequate for preparing the children for a networked society. Hence, the investigator has chosen the right area for the present study. NEED OF THE STUDY Electronic technology has paved the way for students to learn through the use of computers, anytime and anywhere. Integrating technology in teaching has been a challenge to teachers since they need to make effective use of it in order to develop student’s independent learning skills and enhance learning. By using technology in teaching, the teacher helps students increase their creativity which also promotes self-confidence. It also provides an avenue for developing independent learning skills and in the process, engaging students in their learning and in developing self-esteem. It is also essential in teaching and learning mathematics; it influences the mathematics that is taught and enhances student’s learning. According to Moore (1986), “Teachers who do not use the computer in their teaching are not only doing a disservice to their pupils, but are rejecting a teaching tool which is limited in its use by the imagination of the teacher.” It is not necessary to list or to describe each situation in which the computer can be used as an educational medium. Nevertheless, it may be pointed out that the computer lends itself to a variety of uses and is capable of teaching various types of curricula at almost all levels in both face-to-face and distance modes of instruction. As the Internet is global, unlimited, and open to the public, the teaching applications planned for the Internet environment have a www.ijmer.in
98
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
potential for moderating the nature of distance learning. It seems that it will be the only distance learning tool of the near future. E-learning, as a new version of distance learning, is applied via Internet technologies and involves educational activities which do not require the presence of the teacher and learner at the same time and place. Keeping all this in mind, the investigator has attempted a study to find out the effectiveness of E-learning modules in mathematics. OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY The present study has the following objectives. 1. To study the effectiveness of E-learning modules in mathematics at the Higher Secondary level. 2. To find out the significant difference, if any, between the pretest and post-test scores in in mathematics at the Higher Secondary level of the Experimental group. 3. To find out the significant difference, if any, between the pretest and post-test scores in the E-learning modules in mathematics at the Higher Secondary level of the Control group. HYPOTHESES OF THE STUDY The study has the following hypotheses: 1. E-learning modules in Mathematics at the Higher Secondary level are not effective. 2. The post-test mean scores in Mathematics at the Higher Secondary level is not significantly higher than the pre-test mean scores of the Experimental group. 3. The
post-test
mean
scores
of
E-learning
modules
in
Mathematics at the Higher Secondary level is not significantly higher than the pre-test mean scores of the Control group .
www.ijmer.in
99
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
SAMPLE OF THE STUDY The investigator chose the XI Standard learners of the Maths and Science group from Shri Hindocha Government Aided Higher Secondary School, Ariyur, Pondicherry, for the investigation. The investigator selected 40 students based on their age and the marks obtained in the second mid-term test through random sampling technique and formed a homogeneous group. Based on their achievement in the pre-test, these 40 learners were equally so divided into two groups that so their mean score were nearly equal and were named the Control group and the Experimental group. EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN Randomized –Two Group - Pre-Test – Treatment – Post-Test design This design includes pre-test and post-test in the design. The gain scores of the members of the two groups may be compared for ascertaining the influence of the treatment over the dependent variable. The paradigm (model) of the design will be Gr1
(E)
PrT
T
PoT
Gr2
(C)
PrT
--
PoT
The investigator used the pre-test-post-test control group design in this study. The Control group and the Experimental group were compared in all aspects. The Control group was taken as the reference, which was used to compare the Experimental group. The Control group was taught through the traditional methods Experimental group was exposed to the E-learning modules.
www.ijmer.in
and
the
100
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
RESEARCH TOOLS The present study used the following tools: 1)
E-learning modules in Mathematics
2)
Achievement test
DATA ANALYSIS The Mean and Standard Deviation of the scores secured by the Higher Secondary Students in the pre-test and post-tests through Elearning modules and the traditional method of the experimental and control group are tabulated and presented in table-1. Table-1 Variables
Tests
N
M
E-learning Modules
Pre-test
20
18.7
Post-test
20
37.65
2.89
Pre-test
20
18.4
3.50
Post-test
20
22.2
Traditional Method
Difference between means
SD
3.67 18.95
3.8
3.07
From the data, it is observed that there is an increase in the mean scores of the Higher Secondary Students in the post-tests for the experimental and control groups. The difference between means for the experimental group is 18.95, whereas for the control group, it is 3.8. Hence, it is evident that the experimental group achieved more and proved its effectiveness by adopting the treatment. Hypothesis 1:
E-learning modules in mathematics at the Higher
Secondary level are not effective.
www.ijmer.in
101
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Table-2 The post-test scores of the Experimental group and Control group taught through E-learning modules and through traditional method do not differ. Variable
Test
N
M
Experimental Egroup Post (E-learning Modules)
20
37.65 2.89
Control Group (Traditional Method)
CPost
SD
Mean tdf Difference value
15.45
7.79
38
Level of Sig. (0.01)
0.01
20 22.20 3.04
The mean of the post-test scores of the Experimental group taught through E-learning modules is found to be 37.65 with an SD 2.89. The mean of post-test scores of Control group taught through traditional method is found to be 22.20 with an SD 3.04. The mean difference 15.45 is found to be significant at a 0.01 level for 38 df with a‘t’ of 7.79. Therefore, the hypothesis is rejected. It is concluded that the E-learning modules in mathematics at the higher secondary level are effective as compared to that of the control group. Hypothesis:2 The post-test mean scores in Mathematics at the Higher Secondary level is not significantly higher than the pre-test mean scores of the Experimental group.
www.ijmer.in
102
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Table-3 The post-test and pre-test mean scores of E-learning modules in Mathematics of the Experimental group do not differ. Variable
Test
Experimental Egroup Post (E-learning EModules) Pre
N
M
SD
Mean tDifference value
20 37.65 2.89 19 20
18.7
8.60
df
38
Level of Sig. (0.01) 0.01
3.67
The mean of post-test scores of Experimental group taught through E-learning modules is found to be 37.65 with an SD 2.89. The mean of pre-test scores of Experimental group through the E-learning modules is found to be 18.7 with an SD 3.67. The mean difference 19 is found to be significant for the t-value 8.60, which is significant at 0.01 level for 38 df. Therefore, the hypothesis is rejected. It is concluded that there is a significant difference between the Post-test and Pre-test scores of the Experimental group taught through E-learning modules in Mathematics at the Higher Secondary level. Hypothesis: 3
The post-test mean scores of the control group in
Mathematics at the Higher Secondary level is not significantly higher than the pre-test mean scores of the Control group.
www.ijmer.in
103
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Table-4 The post-test and pre-test mean scores of the Control group taught through traditional method do not differ. Variable
Test
N
M
SD
Control Cgroup Post (Traditional CMethod) Pre
20
22.2
3.04
20
18.4
Mean Difference
tvalue
df
Level of Sig. (0.01)
3.8
1.73
38
NS
3.5
The mean of post-test scores of Control group taught through traditional method is found to be 22.2 with an SD 3.04. The mean of pre-test scores of Control group through the traditional method is found to be 18.4 with an SD 3.5. The mean difference 3.8 is found to be not significant for the t-value 1.73, for 38 df. Therefore, the hypothesis is accepted. It is concluded that there is no significant difference between the Pre-test and Post-test scores of the Control group taught through the traditional method in mathematics at the Higher Secondary level. RESULTS OF HYPOTHESIS TESTING It is found that there is a significant mean difference of 15.45, between the post-test scores of the Experimental and Control group in mathematics at the Higher Secondary level with a t-value of 7.79, which is significant at the 0.01 levels for 38 dfs. It is found that there is a significant mean difference of 19.00 between the pre-test and post-test scores of the Experimental group through the E-learning modules in mathematics at the Higher
www.ijmer.in
104
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Secondary level with a t-value of 8.60, which is significant at the 0.01 levels for 38 dfs. It is found that there is no significant mean difference of between the pre-test and post-test scores of the Control group through the traditional method, with at-value of 1.73, which is not significant for 38 dfs. MAJOR FINDINGS OF THE STUDY The E-learning modules in Mathematics are found to be effective. The performance of the learners in the experimental group in the post-test is better than that of the pre-test performance. The mean scores of the post-tests of the experimental group are higher than that of the mean scores of the control group, indicating significant difference at a 0.05 level. The E-learning modules in Mathematics were established to be superior over the conventional method of instruction. SUGGESTIONS FOR FURTHER RESEARCH Any good research, even after answering its research questions, must be inclined to update and innovate new ideas for further contributions to needy people. In that way, the following suggestions for further investigations are made.
A similar study may be carried out in other subjects like Physics, Chemistry, Biology, etc.
Studies on the effectiveness of E-learning modules may be extended to other education levels such as, the primary, secondary graduation, and post-graduation stages.
As the E-learning modules are web enabled, further attempts may be taken to find out the effectiveness of E-learning modules among students in a global scenario.
www.ijmer.in
105
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
As the E-learning modules were exclusively prepared in English, further research may be attempted to develop E-learning modules in the regional language, and accordingly, the effectiveness of it may be determined.
CONCLUSION In order to survive in a digital economy, teachers need digital age proficiencies. It is important for the educational system to make parallel changes in order to fulfill its objectives, namely, the preparation of teachers for the world beyond the classroom, and therefore, the educational system must embrace the twenty-firstcentury skills within the context of rigorous academic standards. ‘A traditional learning structure does not guarantee the delivery of a consistent message whereas consistency is assured in E-learning” (Albert Lewis, 2005). The pervasive use of technology in all spheres of life, the knowledge economy, and the paradigm shift together, generate demands to the teacher and the learner to adopt ways that help to inculcate twenty-first-century skills among students. Right now in India, educational institutions are gearing up to provide information networks to give students access to digital resources. The main purpose of this study is to develop E-learning modules in mathematics and to study its effectiveness. The statistical analysis indicates that the post-test results gained a significant achievement in behavioural terms after the treatment and points out the superiority of the E-learning modules in improving the achievement among school students. Thus, the analysis reveals that E-learning modules in mathematics improve school students’ achievement.
www.ijmer.in
106
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
References 1. Abdallah Arman (2009), “The effect of e-learning approach on students’ achievement in Biomedical Instrumentation Course at Palestine Polytechnic University”, Communications of IBIMA, 141-146, Volume 9, ISSN: 1943-7765. 2. Alday, R. and Panaligan, A. (2010), “The Effects of E-learning in Mathematics to College Students: The Philippines Experience”. In D. Gibson & B. Dodge (Eds.), Proceedings of Society for Information Technology & Teacher Education International Conference 2010 (pp. 2629-2633). Chesapeake, VA: AACE. 3. Bachratá* K. mathematics”,
and H. Bachratý(2011),“ E-learning in 9th IEEE International Conference on
Emerging eLearning Technologies and Applications , Stará Lesná, The High Tatras, Slovakia. 4. Balarabe Yushau(2006), “The Effects of Blended E-Learning on Mathematics and Computer Attitudes in Pre-Calculus Algebra”, The Montana Mathematics Enthusiast, ISSN 1551-3440, Vol. 3, no.2, pp. 176-183. 5. Kekkonen, Moneta et al., (2002), “E-Learning in Hong Kong: Comparing Learning Outcomes in Online Multimedia and lecture versions of an Introductory Computing Course”, British Journal of Educational technology, Vol.33, A:4, P423-33, Sep 2002. 6. Mohammad Madallh Alhabahba et al.,(2012), “E-learning! The New Paradigm of Education: Factorial Analysis”, International Journal of Humanities and Social Science, Vol. 2 No. 4 [Special Issue – February 2012] 7. Mohanasundaram,K. and Soosairaj, J. (2008), “Effectiveness of web based classroom instruction in learning mathematics with reference to attitude, interaction and web skills of higher
www.ijmer.in
107
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
secondary students”, Ph.D., Thesis Submitted to Tamil University, Thanjavur, T.N., India. 8. Nisha Raninga (2010), “Effectiveness of CAI for Teaching of Mathematics of Standard VII”, Journal of Advances in Developmental Research Vol. 1 (2) 2010 : p. 186-187.ISSN: 0976-4704 (Print), e-ISSN: 0976-4844 (Online) 9. Odd
Bringslid
(2002),
“Mathematical
e-learning
using
interactive mathematics on the Web”, European Journal of Engineering Education, Volume 27, Issue 3, 2002.
www.ijmer.in
108
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
EXIT INTERVIEWS AND THE GLOBAL SCENARIO Dr.Vasaka Sridevikiran Associate Professor Department of Management Studies K.G.R.L Degree &P.G.College Bhimavaram, Andhra Pradesh INTRODUCTION Over the years a great emphasis has been laid upon to understand the reasons for employees exit. In order to understand this, HR practitioners try to focus on the facts that comes out as a result of exit interview. They do so due to the belief that an exit interview helps the organization to understand the reasons for voluntary employee turnover and also to gather the information which can help to improve individual and organizational performance. Human Resources constitute very valuable asset of any organization. They are the real strength to any organization and the success of the organization depends on the quality of human resources. An organization with skilled employees can perform wonders in this global scenario. The time has come when the employer has to step down from his ivory tower to find ways of how to retain his skilled employees. Employee exit has become a common phenomenon in today's global era. Today's employee has a high profile and is well educated when compared to his counterpart few decades ago. There are a number of opportunities waiting for a talented employee. The rate of employee attrition is high in many organizations where the employees are not provided with better salary, benefits, recognition, better career prospects etc. To understand why the employee wants to exit the organization he is working, the management conducts an exit interview. The HR Manager conducts Exit interview and tries to assess the reasons behind his exit from the organization and takes necessary www.ijmer.in
109
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
measures to rectify the drawbacks of the organization. Exit interview refers to a brief structured interview with departing employee leaving the organization. An exit interview is a meeting between the departing employee and at least one representative from the company (either someone from the Human Resources Department or the functional head of the employee). Employees who are leaving the organization voluntarily are sources of priceless information. Exit interviews can be termed as confessional interviews by the departing employee. The outgoing employees must be those who have voluntarily resigned rather than getting laid off or fired. It is an effective HR tool that is used by organizations to find out from an outgoing employee the reasons behind his leaving the organization. Exit interviews can provide valuable insights to the employers to know how to retain their talented staff and improve their work culture as well as the workplace environment. Previously exit interviews were not conducted on a routine basis because it was considered to be futile to ask the departing employee-"Why do you go?" The employers were more focused on getting the position filled as soon as possible instead of determining how the vacancy could have been avoided. Their approach was based on the assumption that the market was full of unscrupulous, unmanageable and unappreciative workers. With the passage of time, the organizations have now started to realize the significance of exit interviews. The type of exit interview method to be used depends upon the discretion of the top management and the HR department of the organization. PURPOSE OF EXIT INTERVIEWS Exit interviews can provide vital clues on various organizational aspects like working conditions, interpersonal relations, pay packages, policies, etc. An exit interview offers an opportunity to:
Find out the actual reasons for an employee's resignation.
www.ijmer.in
110
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Gather trustworthy data on problem areas, in order to help the management take remedial actions.
Retain a talented employee by finding the reasons for his dissatisfaction and agreeing on feasible solutions.
Encourage good relations with the departed employee.
METHODS FOR CONDUCTING EXIT INTERVIEWS a. In-Person Exit Interviews With in-person exit interviews an HR representative meets individually with each terminating employee. Pros:
Can provide information regarding benefits and retrieve company property during the exit interview.
Gives a personal touch to each employee
Cons:
Employees may be afraid to share sensitive or negative information during an in-person exit interview.
For larger companies, it may be time consuming to exit interview every employee
It's difficult to track information received verbally during an exit interview
b. Telephone Exit Interviews Telephone Exit Interviews are conducted over the telephone by an HR Representative or an outside third party consultant. Pros:
Can probe for more information on each exit interview question.
www.ijmer.in
111
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Enter data into a tracking system while conducting the exit interview.
Easier to schedule than in-person exit interviews
Cons:
Time consuming if done in-house by an HR Representative
Expensive if done with an outside consultant
Employees often reluctant to verbally share sensitive or negative information
c. Paper and Pencil Exit Interviews Paper and Pencil Exit Interviews are usually conducted by a form that is given to the employee on their last day or mailed to the employee's home. Pros:
Takes less time to provide an exit interview form compared with conducting an in person or phone exit interview
Employees can share information on paper that they may be reluctant to say in person
Cons:
Return rates for Exit Interview forms average just 30-35%
Difficult and time consuming to compile and track the data from paper and pencil exit interviews
d. Online Exit Interview: Pros:
Employee self-service so easy for HR to administer
www.ijmer.in
112
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Employees comfortable sharing information by computer so more honest responses
Information automatically compiles and tracked
Reports available at a click of a button
Participation rates double that for paper and pencil exit interview
FORMAT OF EXIT INTERVIEW Exit interviews should be used as a tool to build a parting relationship with the outgoing employees. These can serve as an eye-opener for the employers as they will come to know what their employees think about them. It is very much important for the organizations to find out why their employees leave the organization and as an employee's genuine reasons for leaving can be exposed in exit interviews so the employers must take proper care while deciding on the format of exit interview. The exit interview design should contain as many open-minded questions as possible so that the employee can express his views regarding the reasons for leaving the organization, his commitment towards work, his expectations from the job as well as from the organization, his career prospects, the work culture, the management style of his seniors, the training provided by the organization, the working environment, the pay package, etc. While the employer might have a lot of questions in mind, it is advisable not to ask unrelated questions regarding private life. Some of the questions which the employer would like to ask are as follows:
Why did you join this organization?
Is there anything that you like and dislike most about this company?
Why are you leaving?
www.ijmer.in
113
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
If the reason behind leaving is getting higher placement then what prompted you to look for a new job?
Do you feel that the training you have received is inadequate to help you do your job?
Do you think that there should be any change in the employment practices followed by the organization?
Although these are some of the questions which are useful in getting the appropriate feedback from the departing employee, the list is not exhaustive as the organizations need to ask questions according to their requirements, so they can prepare their own questionnaire by keeping in mind their own features and experiences. Who Should Conduct? The definition of exit interview implies that exit interviews are conducted by the employer or the management to unearth the reasons for employee turnover. In case of in person exit interview the company's representative may be either the functional head of the employee or someone from the HR department and not the employees' direct supervisor. In order to reap the benefits of exit interviews, the organizations can hire an experienced third party, a consultant or firm that specializes in conducting these sensitive interviews because most of the outgoing employees may not like to offend the management at the time of leaving the organization. When and Where to Conduct? The views of the employers regarding when and where to conduct confessional interviews may be different. It is always advisable to conduct the exit interview as soon as the employee puts in his papers. But the case will be different if the person has been handed over the pink slip. In such a situation, it is advisable to conduct the interview at a later date. The next important question is where to conduct these www.ijmer.in
114
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
interviews. The interview climate should be positive and professional. The physical ambience should be given apt importance. The employers should avoid conducting the interviews in public places like coffee shops or canteens where they may be overheard by supervisors or other employees. It is always better to conduct them in the HR department's private office or on the premises of third party doing it. To provide flexibility to the employee some companies prefer to go for telephonic exit interviews so that the employee can avail the comfort of speaking from his own home. The next important question to consider is who will decide whether or not to participate in an exit interview. The answer is that it will depend on the outgoing employee and not the employer. The departing employee must consider whether he will benefit from an exit interview, the HR department will give importance to the employee's feedback. HOW
TO
USE
THE
DATA
COLLECTED
FROM
EXIT
INTERVIEWS? The purpose of conducting exit interviews will be fruitful when it is aimed at encouraging the retention of valued employees. To accomplish the rationale of exit interviews not only the HR department but everybody from the top-level management to the immediate supervisor must be involved in the process. Exit interview is a medium which can be used to find out how the company is being perceived by its human resources. The information gathered through these interviews is otherwise difficult or impossible to find out. They help avoid costly lawsuits down the line, caused by discontented employees. They also help assess the key areas of the company like pay packages, training and development, recruitment, infrastructure, supervision, HR policies, etc. The company can start the process of retaining the talented employees in the initial stage itself. A company has the liberty to choose from a range of strategies available which they consider to be the best suited for their organization. www.ijmer.in
115
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Talented worker should be given the freedom to choose his work schedule as ideas can be generated at any time. Hewlett Packard has initiated this strategy.
The corporate houses can offer incentive packages to selected individuals.
The need of the hour is to maintain a personal touch with the potential targets. Regular training sessions can be conducted help the employees achieve goals on their personalized career graphs. This has been adopted by Maruti Udyog Ltd.
Positive and constructive feedback can be provided on a regular basis.
Retention of talented employees can be enhanced by improving the process of socializing the new employee into the corporate culture.
The senior management must play the role of a leader by demonstrating their own sense of commitment to the organization.
The management must establish the practice of fair treatment of all the employees so as to foster a positive work environment.
Thus the proper implementation of feedback obtained from exit interviews is not only valuable for the departing employees, but also for the organization as a whole because exit interview is an important HR means for employee retention. Despite the merits above mentioned, some experts are of the view that exit interviews are a mere waste of time. LITERATURE REVIEW According to Van Wert, I. Gregg (2004) in his article” An evolving view of exit interviews” said that attrition is going to be there and it should www.ijmer.in
116
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
there. The challenge of good management is to ensure that such attrition is acceptable, and that it stays that way, he added. The main purpose of the exit interview is to find out the reasons for their exit and to ensure they do so in an orderly way. Many managers try to avoid the exit interview because they feel that it may reveal their organisational limitations and failures, which may not be liked by the top management. He also suggested that Interview findings must be communicated in the form of recommendations and suggestions tor training. It was further substantiated by Neil, Martha (2006), the purpose of exit interview is to gather real information about their experience at the firm and also to understand why they are looking to leave and what led them to make that decision. Levin Geg (2007) discusses the critical practices and components that should be incorporated into any exit interview strategy to positively impact on staff attrition. He suggested that using an independent third party to conduct exit interviews is the best way to make the departing employees at ease during the interview process and also to get best results in exit interviewing, standardizing the interview or survey process is important. Faragher, Jo (2008) said in his article “Why staff really leave” that employee's real reasons for leaving a job are quite different to why human resource (HR) thinks they go. His article survey further revealed that 79 per cent of organisations do not have a discrete budget for employee retention. He also said that anonymous data must be most valued, the organisation must not always try to find out fault in supervision and there is always confusion on ownership of exit interview data. Bhatnagar, Jyotsna. (2007) further added that factors of organizational culture, career planning along with incentives and organizational
www.ijmer.in
117
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
support must be focus of exit interview data. It was further mentioned in the article that the first two were indicative of high attrition. In the words of Flamholtz. E. G (2003), the exit interview enables not only an improved understanding of the reasons why employees leave, but provides opportunities for effective communication in several additional areas as well. These include for example: clarification of complaints against employees being released; sharing of information about benefits, including maintenance of medical insurance, pension programs, and eligibility for unemployment compensation; promotion of positive relations with former employees; discussion of policies on references and eligibility for rehire; and identification of problem areas that require corrective measures. Garretson, P., & Teel, K. S. (1992) pointed that the two major elements of the exit interview are discovery and communication. Neither the discovery of an employee’s motivation for vacating a position nor the sharing of this information with management is easy tasks. A commitment of sufficient time and appropriate staff for dialogue, analysis, and feedback is essential. Staff understanding and cooperation are also critical so that the exit interview is viewed as more than another mandatory procedure that must be completed before a final pay-check is issued. The study of Lefkowitz, J., & Katz, M. L. (2006) reveals that Exit interviews in an organization should be conducted by one individual, preferably a personnel professional who is knowledgeable about the work of the library, who is effective in a private and face-to-face interview setting, and who is trusted by the employees. Credibility and approachability are essential qualities. In some large organizations it may be necessary to share this responsibility by assigning one interviewer to each major employee group. In some small organizations,
www.ijmer.in
118
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
where a personnel professional is not on the staff, contracting with an outside office or individual may be appropriate. CONCLUSION Employee exit interviews can change the climate of the organization by changing management style, making changes that reflect employee opinions, and creating value recognition programs where needed. In a broader perspective, exit interviews provide information about overall management style of the company. An employee who is discharged may not be happy about it, and his or her comments will have a negative slant. But there’s usually plenty of truth to be learned as well. Taking a more positive view of the exit—this is also the time when many employees are willing to point at deficiencies in the company, comments such as, “poor management or supervision”, “complete lack of supervision and support”, “poor communications”, etc.. Exit is just as important as the procedures one uses while hiring. Handled in a professional way, exit practices can be constructive, useful and improve the employee work environment and above all improve employee retention. Exit interviews if conducted with a purpose can prove to be an excellent tool for measuring inadequacies in management policies. It is valuable only if used to make positive changes in the organization. Exit and Stay Interview serve different yet complementary purposes, with latter proactively focusing on the individual and staff retention & exit interviews focusing on the organization and the issues causing staff turnover. A well-designed plan of exit interview has the potential to become a valuable tool to help retain the talented workforce. Thus it has been truly said, "The Exit Interview is an opportunity to shake hands and leave as friends and not as enemies.
www.ijmer.in
119
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
References 1. Human Resource Management – S.Mizra 2. HRD Review 3. Acs, Zoltan J. and David B. Audretsch. 1988. “Innovation in Large and Small Firms: an Empirical Analysis,”American Economic Review, 78(4), 678-690. 4. Aswathappa.K (2005), Human Resource Management, Text and Cases, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi. 5. Aswathappa.K (2005), Organisation Behaviour, Text and Cases, 6th Edition, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi. 6. V S P. Rao (2005), Human Resource Management, Text and Cases, 2nd Edition, Published by Anurag Jain, New Delhi. 7. Van Wert, I. Gregg, An Evolving View of Exit Interviews, American Printer, Sep2004, Vol. 233 Issue 6,p40-40. 1p. 8. Neil, Martha, Exit Strategies, ABA Journal, Feb2006, Vol. 92 Issue 2, p22-22. 1P 9. Levin, Geg, Are Exit Interviews a way out of turnover hell?, Call Center Magazine, Jan2007, Vol. 20 Issue 1, p34-37. 3P 10. Faragher, Jo., Why staff really leave, Personnel Today. 1/22/2008, p22-23. 2p 11. Hussain, S.A, Ravindra, P. S, Exit Interview- A Vital Tool for Managing Departing Employees, Ahinav, National Journal of Research in Commerce and Management, 2003, Vol.2, Issue I, p 1-10, 10p. 12. Garretson, P., Teel, K.S., The Exit Interview: Effective Tool or Meaningless gesture?, Journal of Personnel Management, 1992, Vol. 1, Issue 2, p 70-77, 8p. 13. Lefkowitz, J., & Katz, M. L. (2006), “Validity of exit interviews”, Personnel Psychology, 22(Winter), pp.445-455.
www.ijmer.in
120
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN HOTEL COMPANIES AND TRAVEL AGENCIES: A STUDY FROM THE PERSPECTIVE OF SERVICE INTERMEDIARIES OF TOURISM INDUSTRY Everil Jacklin Fernandes Research Scholar Bahadur Institute of Management Sciences Mysore, Karnataka
Dr.M.Amulya Assistant Professor Bahadur Institute of Management Sciences Mysore, Karnataka
INTRODUCTION Tourism sector is becoming the most powerful growth engine in the new millennium .According to the World Tourism Organization, by the year 2020, it is expected that India will become the leader in the Tourism industry in south Asia, with about 8.9 million arrivals. International Tourist arrivals surpassed the milestone 1 billion tourist globally for the first time in history in 2012. Tourism involves travelling to relatively undisturbed or uncontaminated natural areas with the specific objectives of studying, admiring, and enjoying the scenery and its wild life flora and fauna, as well as other existing cultural and historical aspects. Tourism is travelling for predominantly recreational, leisure purposes, or the provision of services to support this leisure travel. The World Tourism Organization defines tourists as people who “travel to and stay in places outside their usual environment for not more than one consecutive year for leisure, business and other purposes not related to the exercise of an activity remunerated from within the place visited”. Tourism has become a popular global leisure activity. Tourism is vital for countries due to the large intake of money for businesses with their goods and services and the opportunity for employment in the service industries associated with tourism. These services industries include transportation services such as cruise ships and taxis, accommodation
www.ijmer.in
121
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
such as hotels and entertainment venues and other services such as resorts. As per the International Union of Official Travel Organization (IUOTO), now called as World Tourism Organization (WTO), has defined tourist as a temporary visitor staying for at least 24 hours in a country visited when the purpose of the journey can be classified under one of the following headings a) Leisure: - recreation, holiday, health, study of religion and sports or b) Business, family, mission meetings In the tourism industry, people are not just looking at the facilities or price offered but also looking at the services provided. If they are satisfied or delighted with their previous experience in using the service they might come again besides promote the services to others. This situation will generate the revenue for the company. The company does not need to work hard to promote their services. They just have to be concerned with the services provided to the customer and must fulfill the customers’ expectation. Tourism companies must emphasize on building stronger relationships in order to succeed. LITERATURE REVIEW 1. Boonajsevee (2005), in his study titled ‘Relationship marketing: Loyalty intentions in new era of Thai bank marketing’ claimed that loyalty is a primary goal of relationship marketing, and sometimes is equated with the relationship marketing concept itself. 2. Selvam. M, Babu. M ., et al (2004) in their study titled ‘Tourists Satisfaction-A Study of Tiruchirappally District, Tamil Nadu’ the major findings of the study revealed that , Tourism is an industry continually dealing with people. Hence tourism needs continuous cordial human relationships. The travel agents, tourist guides, the
www.ijmer.in
122
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
hoteliers, etc. are jointly and severally responsible for creating a situation that develops good human relations. 3. Kim & Cha, (2002), conducted research on the topic ‘Effects of relationship marketing on repeat purchase and word of mouth’ the findings of the study revealed that the increasing emphasis on relationship marketing is based on the assumption that, establishing committed tourist relationships leads to positive tourist satisfaction, loyalty, words of mouth, and recreational demand in association with the festivals. 4. Sheth and Parvatiyar (1994),in their study titled ‘Case for Relationship Marketing: Issues in Relating the Approach to Tourism Partnerships’, state that relationship marketing is the understanding, explanation and management of the on-going collaborative business relationship between suppliers. 5. Morgan and Hunt (1994) pointed out that all relationship marketing activities tend to establish, develop and maintain successful relation exchange. 6. Shani and Chalasani (1992), in their study titled ‘Exploiting niches using relationship marketing, define relationship marketing as “an integrated effort to identify, maintain, and build up a network with individual consumers and to continuously strengthen the network for the mutual benefit of both sides, through interactive, individualized and value-added contacts over a long period of time” . RELATIONSHIP MARKETING IN TOURISM INDUSTRY Relationships are extremely important resource for organisations, irrespective of the activities they are engaged in, this resource is an important one that facilitates all the other activities of the organisation at ease. Especially in the tourism industry, relationships established by www.ijmer.in
123
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
the organisations are essential because of the peculiarities of the product offered to the clients, as well as of the particular needs and wants of the customers. Relationships in tourism industry gain prominence mainly because the product cannot be tried and effectively evaluated before the purchase and the risks perceived by the tourists are considerably high. A good product or service should back a good relationship, a relationship that is a mutual give and take. One of the unique features of the tourism industry that differentiates it from the rest is its composition. Tourism industry comprises of different types of organisations working together to deliver one fine quality experience to its tourists. It comprises of: 1) Travel organisers (i.e. tour operators, wholesale and retail travel agents), 2) Transport companies (i.e. airlines, road transport and shipping companies), 3) Accommodation companies (i.e. hotels, motels, apartments), 4) Food and beverage companies (i.e. restaurants, cafeterias, catering), 4) Leisure and recreational companies (i.e. Theme parks, casinos, art galleries). Along with all these companies we also have co-ordinators of tourism industry (i.e.goverment tourist agencies and associations of tourist organisations). Although these companies operate independently and frequently compete with each other, they all form part of an overall system, in which all organisations interacting with a traveller must work appropriately in order to provide the traveller with a pleasant overall experience.[Gee, Makens and Choy (1989), Howell (1993), Angelo and Vladimir (1994), Middleton (1994)]. We often see that the owners and the managers of the hospitality companies underestimate the importance of aforementioned interrelationships when considering how their company is going to attract customers, as it depends not only on its individual marketing efforts but also on the strategies and actions of other tourist companies.
www.ijmer.in
124
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
HOTEL COMPANIES The elements of a strong relationship between a hotel company and its travel agencies include communication, trust, and making clear as to who does what. Hotels are an important component of the tourism product. They contribute in the overall tourism experience through the standards of facilities and services offered by them. Generally speaking, the accommodation or lodging sector is associated with hotels, motels, motor inns, resorts and other establishments including condominium hotels etc. According to World Tourism Organisation (1995:60), all these establishments are typified as being arranged in rooms, in number exceeding a specified minimum, as coming under a common management, as providing certain services, including room service, daily bed-making and cleaning of sanitary facilities, as grouped in classes and categories according to the facilities and services provided, and are not falling into the category of specialised establishments. Coltman (1989), defines a term hotel as anything from a ten-room boarding house to a building with a thousand or more rooms , convention and meeting facilities , recreation facilities such as swimming pools and twenty –four-hour room service , along with several restaurants with various types of entertainment. Individual hotel properties can also be classified based on their operating arrangement. The individual hotel chains can operate in the form of management contracts, franchising, referral and joint venture. Hotels are also classified based on the different price levels charged; they may be economy of budget hotels, mid price or first class hotels, high price or luxury hotels. Based on their clientele hotels can also be classified as business hotels and leisure hotels. TRAVEL AGENCIES Travel agency like discussed earlier is the most important link in the tourism industry, as it functions as an intermediary between the
www.ijmer.in
125
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
suppliers of tourism products and services. There are basically two types of travel agencies: wholesale and retail. A wholesale travel agent specialises in contracting large amount of tourist products and services at advantageous prices. Generally speaking, these products and services are then offered to retail travel agencies. However companies that are responsible for organising packages are usually referred to as tour operators. A retail travel agency sells tourist products and services directly to the consumer and may also design tailor made tours for individual customers. Retail travel agencies normally represent wholesale travel agencies, tour operators and speciality intermediaries, together with accommodation, transport and leisure companies. The retailer acts as an agent for the supplier and is paid on a commission basis. RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN HOTELS & TRAVEL AGENCIES One way of reaching a geographically diverse marketplace is through travel agents. In addition to selling airline tickets, travel agents book hotel sales, and nearly all cruise travel. Hotels typically pay 10 percent commission to travel agents, and cruise lines can pay up to 15 percent. The number of travel agents has been decreasing in recent years due to the growth of direct booking and customers self –booking travel on the internet. Hotels interested in travel agency business are listed in hotel guides. Hotels also send information packages to travel agents that include collateral material and hotel news, including updates about hotel packages, promotions and special events. Travel agents are also invited to visit hotel property on familiarization tour (FAM trips). It is important that FAM trips are well organized. Finally, promotional campaigns can be directed at travel agents through travel agent publications such as Travel Weekly, Travel Trade and Travel Agent.
www.ijmer.in
126
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Hotels seeking travel agent business must make it easy for agents to make reservations. Providing toll-free reservation number is essential. Hotels that generate many bookings from travel agents have a separate number dedicated to business travel. Travel agents like to be paid quickly. Hotels that want travel agent business process commissions rapidly. Hyatt guarantees payment within one week of the guest’s departure. Foreign chains are now paying commissions in the travel agents local currency, eliminating the need for the agent to go through the costly process of converting a commission check. Hospitality providers who serve travel agents must remember that agents entrust the hotel with their customers. In a travel agency market survey, travel agents rated reputation for honouring reservations, reputation for good service, ease of collecting commission and room rates are the most important factors in choosing a hotel. Hotels must do everything possible to make a favourable impression on guests booked through travel agents to ensure future business from that agent. Corporate travel agents are one agency business. Companies are Large corporations spend billions amount represents a cost that
of the strongest areas of the travel a major source of travel bookings. of rupees travel. Each rupees of that corporations would like to reduce.
Consequently, companies make arrangements with travel agents and in some cases set up their own travel agency. Many organizations sign an exclusive agreement with one travel agency, and employees are required to book through this firm. The travel agency assumes responsibility for locating the least expensive travel alternatives for the company. In their relationships with hotel companies, travel agencies play three primary roles, (Schulz 1994, Angelo and Vladimir 1994, Albert and Pinole 1990, Gee, Makens and Choy 1989), representation design and
www.ijmer.in
127
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
promotion of tourist packages with stay in hotels, and advertising and promotion.
Firstly, travel agencies are hotel representatives as they make hotel reservations for their customers’ .Moreover, travellers usually ask travel agencies for hotels before selecting a hotel. A traveller benefits in a couple of ways by going through a travel agency for the same, it includes convenience and certainty of appropriate hotel arrangements in comparison with direct contacts with individual hotels. Travel agencies usually have promotional prices for hotel rooms from which travellers may also benefit.
Secondly, travel agencies, especially wholesalers, design and sell tourist packages with stay in hotels. Therefore, travel agencies buy and book hotel rooms themselves. Communication actions of these packages also involve free advertisement of hotels in brochures and travel journals.
Thirdly, travel agencies, particularly wholesalers, usually publish and distribute brochures and travel journals with overall information about their products and services, including the hotel rooms, special offers, description of tourist destinations are some of the information available in travel agencies publications. These publications are distributed among retail travel agencies and amongst the travellers themselves, this serves as an appealing advertisement support to the hotels.
The role of hotel companies in their relationships with travel agencies has three basic functions, (Schulz 1994, Angelo and Vladimir 1994, Vallen and Vallen 1991, Scoviak and Lerner 1990): Payment of commissions, contribution to travel agency’s customer satisfaction, and advertisement of travel agencies.
www.ijmer.in
128
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Firstly,
travel
agencies
receive
commissions
from
hotel
companies as compensation for guest –room reservations. The standard commissions from hotels are 10 percent, although it can vary from property to property and even within the same property over time. This commission is higher than that paid by airlines, which foster travel agencies interest by having business relationships with hotel companies. Travel agencies are further paid for advertising costs related to hotels, advertisements being in the form of brochures, posters, schedules.
Secondly, hotels contribute to a travel agency’s customer satisfaction. First, having relationships with diverse and appealing hotels may represent a competitive advantage for a travel agency. Moreover, a traveller usually associates his /her travel experience in a hotel booked through a travel agency with the travel agency itself.
Hotel companies may further advertise travel agencies by recommending customers to contact a particular travel agency for making hotel reservations.
However hotels and travel agencies have not established an entirely satisfactory business relationship. Despite the fact that travel agencies book more than 95 percent of cruises, about 90 percent of airline tickets, and 50 percent of car rentals. Only 20-25 percent of all hotel rooms are reserved through agencies, (Schulz 1994, Angelo and Vladimir 1994). Hoteliers are however, seeking ways to increase revenues by working with travel agencies to expand sales in a cost effective fashion. At the same time, agencies are turning to hotel bookings to bolster their revenues as airline commissions are decreasing (earlier being 3 percent now reduced to 1 percent). As a result it is expected that travellers in the coming decade will place their
www.ijmer.in
129
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
complete hotel reservations through travel agencies, (Angelo and Vladimir 1994). Hotels V/s Travel agents Each player in the tourism industry has different commercial and strategic interests, as well as operational procedures, several intrachannel conflicts emerge inevitably. A major source of conflict is usually the incompatibility and antagonism between targets and goals set by each partner. We see this happening at the strategic level .The objectives of the hotels and the travel agents are antagonistic and incompatible to a certain extent as the two partners compete within the channel in order to maximise their financial benefit. Travel agents, in particular larger mass ones attempt to increase their profitability by enlarging their market share and volume, through offering inexpensively priced holiday packages. In contrast, hotels have to balance the volume of clients they serve with their average room rates, in order to maximise their yield and achieve a reasonable return on investment. In our direct interview with the hotel companies, we asked them if they had any problems with their travel agency, we got quite an alarming response, only 35% responded positively, the remaining 65% faced some severe issues with their travel agency. Price charged by the hotels is also an area of conflict with travel agents. The price that hotels are forced to charge travel agents for their services was the most important conflict from the hotel companies’ point of view. Fierce competition at the place of origin of the tourist and price wars, force travel agents to sacrifice profit margins in order to maintain market share. As s a result hotels are often given little choice but to offer, or rather accept predetermined contract prices which cover only the devaluation of a destinations currency and a fraction of the inflation at the place of origin, regardless of the local inflation, operational and capital costs. Qualitative research confirmed that often prices offered by travel agents are below the are below the variable operational cost www.ijmer.in
130
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
and therefore hoteliers attempt to minimise their losses rather than maximise profit. When asked the hoteliers about the change in their relationship with their travel agents over the years for the past 5 years, the responses reflected their disappointment which was evident in the qualitative analysis. On a 5 point likert scale measuring 1-5: Much worse to –Much better, 45.5% of the respondents believed that the situation was becoming ‘much worse’, while 27.7% rated it ‘worse’, 12% reported the situation is ‘stable’ , only 13.5% could see an ‘ improvement’ , and a further 1.3%, declared a big improvement. This is a clear indication relationship between hotel companies and travel agents are not getting any better over the years. However both the parties know that they need each other to stay in the market and keep each other’s market share intact. Conclusion Relationships between hotels and travel agencies are often informal, with few formal agreements in place. Many hoteliers believe that they are in direct competition with travel agencies for the same business and are reticent to participate in collaboration agreements with agencies. However, hotels are now beginning to make much more detailed arrangements with agencies. We suggest that travel agencies which are interested in improving their relationship with hotel companies should carry out joint-marketing activities and include more detailed information in the sales leaflets and brochures. Our results suggest that travel agents should be trustworthy, show a cooperative attitude, and are committed to the relationship with the hotel company. Similarly, hotel companies that travel agents see as trustworthy, cooperative, and committed to their relationships with those agents can expect to receive more offers from travel agents to establish long-term business relationships. Most hotels here in this study hotel defines the elements of a good relationship to be honesty, transparency, fair treatment, effective communication. We see here expenses are not the www.ijmer.in
131
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
focus in relationship marketing, hence communication, mutual trust and transparency can be better maintained if the players in tourism industry can collaborate and innovatively use information technology to facilitate the increase of competiveness of both hotels and travel agents. References 1. Angelo, R.M. and A.N.Vladimir , 1994, Hospitality Today: An
introduction, Michigan: The Educational Institute of the American Hotel and Motel Association. 2. Boonajsevee, B. (2005). Relationship marketing: Loyalty intentions
in new era of Thai bank marketing. Fort Lauderdale, FL: Nova South-eastern University 3. Coltman , M.M.,(1989) , Introduction to Travel and Tourism :An
international approach, Ist edition ,new York :Van Nostrand Reinhold. 4. Ghee, Ch.Y, J.C.Makens and D.J.L.Choy , 1989, The Travel
Industry, Ist edition , New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold. 5. Howell , D.W 1993, Passport: An Introduction to the Travel and
Tourism Industry, 2nd edition, ohio: South –western publishing co. 6. Kim
WG,
Cha Y
(2002) Antecedents and
consequences of
relationship quality in hotel industry. Int J Hospitality Manage 21(4):301–471 7. Poon, A. (2001), “The future of travel agents”, Travel & Tourism
Analyst, No. 3, pp. 57‐80. 8. Middleton, V.T.C, 1994, marketing In Travel and Tourism, 2nd
Edition, oxford: Butterworth Heinemann ltd. 9. Morgan, Robert M. And Shelby D. Hunt (1994), “The Commitment-
Trust Theory of Relationship Marketing, “Journal of Marketing, 58 (July), 20–38. www.ijmer.in
132
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
10. Schulz, Ch., 1994, ‘Hotels and Travel Agents: The New Partnership,
The Cornell H.R.A, Qualterly April .pp.45-50. 11. Scovaik-lerner, M., 1990, ‘How to Make Travel Agents A Part of
Your Sales Team’, Hotels, May, pp.63-4. 12. Selvam. M, Babu. M and Vanitha. S, Tourists’ Satisfaction-A Study
of Tiruchirappally District, Tamil Nadu, The Journal Business Studies, Vol.2 No.1, December 2004 page 86.
of
13. Shani and Chalasani (1992), ‘Exploiting Niches Using Relationship
Marketing’ Journal of Consumer marketing’ Vol. 9 Iss: 3, pp.33 – 42. 14. Sheth and Parvatiyar (1994), ‘The Evolution of Relationship
Marketing’, International Business Review Vo|. 4, No. 4, pp. 397418, 1995 Elsevier Science Ltd. Printed in Great Britain. 15. World Tourism Organisation, 1995, Concepts, Definitions and
Classifications for tourism statistics, Ist edition, Madrid: World Tourism Organisation.
www.ijmer.in
133
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
PROMOTING HEALTH EDUCATION AMONG LACTATING MOTHER THROUGH SOCIAL CASE WORK INTERVENTION Mrs. G.Malleswaramma Assistant Professor Department of Social Work Sri Padmavathi Women’s University Tirupati Introduction
Lactating period is very important stage in the life of women. But it is neglected due to various reasons. The lactating mother have a lot of scope to concentrate on health that is importance on intake of nutritious food, breast feeding were child and to maintain good health of children. Hence there a need conduct a study on lactating mother in order to improve their thinking and practicing the good habits towards the health of the child and to the mother. Community health programmes and services are designed to protect, promote, and preserve the health of all population Community health centers and clinics have long served as places where members of vulnerable populations received health care and health education. Education is a key aspect of nursing care provided during the parental period. Appropriate education may result in positive outcomes for the mother and her infant. The educational needs of mothers vary among different populations receiving care; it is imperative that nurses provide the most relevant, up-to-date, and culturally appropriate and sensitive education to the population being served. One particular population that seeks parental care is the medically-indigent and under-insured. The information provided by patients about their parental health education needs may serve as a framework to design a series of educational messages aimed to www.ijmer.in
134
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
increase awareness of healthy lifestyle behaviors and decrease unhealthy behaviors for medically-indigent and underinsured pregnant women. In the present days health status of women is influenced by many factors such as Dietary intake of women, discriminatory behavior toward a girl child, Preference of son, early marriage and so on, Gender discrimination which is further made worse because of amniocentesis. Sex discrimination, female infanticide, female feticide, ect. There are many organizations working for improving health status of lactating women in India, but there is still underutilization of health services by women which is mainly due to Lack of awareness, Ignorance, Poverty stricken families, Lack of importance for their own health, Superstitions among low socio-economic families, High illiteracy amongst women. The condition of women and their health in particular can be improved by timely health care, awareness regarding health care, family planning, nutrition etc. women should be made aware of four A's of health, awareness, availability, accessibility and affordability Thus if women's health is lost it is almost like lost wealth. So present study was an attempt to make current effort to improve their health status. Review of Literature Health service associated with an elevated risk of death related to pregnancy. Centrally important contributing factors were identified as: reproductive choice; nutritional status, co-existing infectious diseases; access to information; access to services; and training and skill of health workers (Lissner, 2001).The most prominent risks to life were identified as those directly associated with pregnancy, childbirth and the infection, unsafe abortion, pregnancy illnesses, such as pre eclampsia and gestational diabetes, and complications of delivery. The www.ijmer.in
135
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
initiative however, gave very limited consideration to health as a determinant of maternal mortality and morbidity. The predominant focus in endeavours to reduce maternal deaths has been on the direct causes of adverse pregnancy outcomes – obstructed labor, hemorrhages and infection and so on. The health services needed to address them (Stokoe, 1991; Maine & Rosenfield, 1999; Goodburn & Campbell, 2001). A poor relationship between the women and her partner is now regarded as a major predictor of depression after childbirth (Romito, 1989; O’Hara & Swain, 1996; Cooper & Murray, 1997; Beck, 2001; Scottish Intercollegiate Guidelines Network, 2002). The problems in their relationship have been conceptualized as: increased marital conflict (Kumar & Robson, 1984); men being less available after delivery, and providing insufficient practical support (O’Hara, 1986) or poor emotional support (Paykel et al., 1980; Dimitrovsky, PerezHirshberg & Istkowitz, 1987); poor adjustment or unhappiness (Webster et al., 1994); low satisfaction (Beck, 2001); insufficient involvement in infant care (Romito, 1989); and holding rigid traditional sex role expectations (Wilson et al., 1996). The relationship with the partner also appears to significantly affect the time taken to recover (Gjendingen & Chaloner, 1994). Very similar findings have emerged from trans cultural studies. A poor quality of marital relationship variously described as inability to confide in an intimate partner or lack of support, or arguments and tension in the relationship is centrally related to women’s mental health postpartum, and has been found to distinguish depressed form non-depressed women in Hong Kong, China (Chan et. al., 2002). Methodology: The presents study was conducted with main aim to promote health education for lactating mother through social case work intervention.
www.ijmer.in
136
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Objectives of the study:
To collect the back ground information from Lactating mothers.
To identify areas of intervention in the context of health education for locating mothers.
To construct and apple pre assessment intervention tool.
To conduct intervention sessions.
To conduct post assessment intervention tool.
Statement of the problem Women are the very important in the family & society. Women take up the major role after marriage, as a women child bearing and rearing the children was a very challenge in present days. The health and development of the children depends on the mothers’ health as well as her knowledge on health, child care, nutrition, breast feeding possibly keeping in view the importance of health education for mothers the present study was conducted. Locale of the study: The present study was conducted in the Bommagunta slums of Tirupati town, Chittoor district of Andhra Pradesh. An Experimental research design was adopted in the present study (Intervention based study). Three lactating women were selected by using purposive sampling method. The short note for the design is diagramed as shown below E = y1 x y2 E = Experimental case Y1= Pre-intervention measurement X = Social work intervention Y2 = Post intervention measurement
www.ijmer.in
137
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Methods & tools of data collection: The researcher used general information interview schedule and prepared a self anchored questionnaire to include various sessions on the issues related to promoting health education for lactating mother through social case work respondents purposively.
intervention
the researcher selected
Data collection Phase I – pre intervention, Phase II – Intervention, Phase III – Post intervention data Phase: I – pre – intervention data: Pre intervention was used before social work intervention; to know the case situation and to assess the knowledge of the lactating mother about Health Education. The questionnaire have 33 questions major areas of this questionnaire is about on breastfeeding, nutrition, immunization, child spacing methods and health care. Questions are given marks. By administered this tool the researcher find out that cases have lack of knowledge on breastfeeding, nutrition, immunization, child spacing methods and health care etc. Phase – II - Intervention The researcher implemented the intervention with three sessions. Each session having pre plan, objective, content, channel of communication, observations. The content of sessions preplan is same for the three cases. The following is content for intervention. Session
Theme
Content
Method
1.
Breast Feeding
Importance of breast Lecture feeding Method Advantages of breast used charts milk
www.ijmer.in
138
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
To educate the pregnant women and lactating women importance of breast feeding. 2.
Nutrition
To establish rapport. About Nutrition food. To educate nutrition food.
3.
4.
Immunization
Explained immunization programme.
about
Lecture method used charts
the Lecture method used charts
Importance immunization.
of
Advantage immunization.
of
child spacing Importance of child Lecture methods spacing methods. method Advantages of child used charts spacing methods. Temporary methods. demonstration
5.
Health care
Personal hygiene of Discussion the mother. Through charts Environmental hygiene, child health, & pictures and developmental aspects
Researcher planned 5 sessions for intervention. And planned content for every session based on the session. The session duration was one hour and the series were conducted once in week.
www.ijmer.in
139
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Phase – III – Post Intervention Post Intervention tool was used after social work intervention to see the impact of intervention. Analysis: Socio-demographic characteristics of the sample: The socio-demographic profile of the study shows that the sample respondent’s age ranges from 20-30years. With regard to type of the family, all clients are belonged to nuclear family .About Education 2 respondents had secondary education & 1 respondents had primary education & regarding occupation of the respondents 2 respondents are house wife’s and one respondent is a working as tailor. With regard to the marital status 3 respondents are married women and belongs to Hindu religion. Table – I Scores before & after the intervention S.No.
Respondents
Scores before the Scores after the intervention intervention
1
1
33
33
2
2
33
35
3
3
37
44
To know the differences between pre & post intervention scores, the data pertaining to these variables are cross tabulated. Table I presents data of two variables, namely, pre test & post test values are shown above.
www.ijmer.in
140
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Mean Pair I Case I Pre Case I Post Pair I Case II Pre Case II Post Pair I Case III Pre Case III Post
Table - II PAIRED SAMPLES STATISTICS N Std. T Deviation
Sig.(2-tailed)
1.60 9.80
3 3
1.140 3.347
-7.364
.002
2.00 9.00
3 3
1.581 2.739
-7.379
.002
1.80 9.40
3 3
1.483 3.130
-6.771
.002
The t-test results show that the differences between pre and post intervention scores are statistically significant. Hence it can be concluded that the social work intervention was effective. Conclusion: The results indicate that, through intervention the lactating women improved their knowledge on all areas of intervention programme on Promoting Health Education among Lactating Mother through social case work intervention. Thus it can be concluded that, the social case work method was proved to be affective in promoting health education among lactating women under study. References 1. Beck CT (2001) Predictors of Postpartum Depression: An Update. Nursing Research, 50(5): 275-285. 2. Fisher J et. al., (2004) Prevalence, Nature, Severity and Correlates of Postpartum Depressive Symptoms in Vietnam. BJOG: An International Journal of Obstetrics and Gynecology, 111:1353-1360. 3. Goodburn E, Campbell O (2001) Reducing Maternal Mortality in the Developing World; Sector-Wide Approaches may be the Key. British Medical Journal, 322 (7291): 917-920. 4. Lissner C (2001) Safe Motherhood Needs Assessment version 1.1. Geneva, World Health Orgnaization. 5. Paykel E et al. (1980) Life events and social support in Puerperal Depression. British Journal of Psychiatry, 136: 339-346.
www.ijmer.in
141
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
THE IMPACT OF LEARNING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (LMS) ON EFL STUDENT PERFORMANCE IN THE SULTANATE OF OMAN Mr. Joshi Thomas
Dr. K. Pramila
Research Scholar Karpagam University Coimbatore Tamil Nadu
Head Department of English PSG Institute of Technology and Applied Research Coimbatore, Tamil Nadu
I. Introduction The world has changed much in terms of technological development since the advent of computers and digital learning environments have replaced the traditional classrooms. The accessibility of information in mobile phones and their other hand held devices have transformed the way people learn a foreign language. The traditional paper dictionaries have been replaced by software programs, translators, dictionaries and thesaurus. Online video lessons are available free of cost. The language learning strategies are adapted to the evolving learning environments. Today, foreign language students have exposure to a vast array of learning resources such as e-books and audiovisual learning material appropriate for their level. Students can be in virtual classrooms, listen to or talk with a native speaker online. The use of computer technology has challenged the traditional methods and approaches and introduced new tools, approaches and strategies in language learning and teaching. II Background A potentially better teaching and learning experience can be provided by the integration of online environments into language classrooms. This combination of online environments with traditional face-to-face learning is called blended learning. The blending of a face-to-face teaching and learning environment with an online environment within the same course allows not only capitalizing on the advantages of each, www.ijmer.in
142
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
but also catering for various learning styles and the needs of different students. Allan (2007) suggests that blended learning offers the opportunity to combine the best of a number of worlds in constructing a program that fits the particular needs in terms of time, space and technologies of a particular group of students or end-users. Technology presents learners with web of world-wide proportions to explore, with a tantalizing, infinite range of pedagogical alternatives mediating access to the target language in authentic situations, taking learners beyond the corners of their classroom and their course book so that they might take charge of their learning and use the target language spontaneously. Al-Mansour and Al-Shorma (2012) conducted a study in which 60 university students were randomly selected and assigned to experimental and control groups. The experimental group used the computers alongside the traditional method and the control group used the traditional method alone. Data collected from this study showed that students taught through computer assisted language instruction showed better achievement than those who were taught through the traditional method alone. III.Statement of the Problem Although there are a number of studies on the impact of CALL on language skills of EFL learners around the world, not much research has been done on the impact of blended learning using Learning Management Systems on EFL students’ overall language proficiency in an Omani context. The use of computers and online learning and teaching in Omani EFL context has been limited until recently. Therefore, the researcher aims to investigate the impact of blended learning on elementary EFL students’ language proficiency.
www.ijmer.in
143
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
IV.Research Question and Hypothesis In order to pursue the purposes of the present study the following research question was posed: Does the application of blended online instruction have any significant effect on Omani elementary EFL learners' level of language proficiency? The researcher proposes to prove that the application of blended online instruction has a significant effect on Omani elementary EFL learners' level of language proficiency. IV. Methodology This study was conducted with Cambridge Learning Management System in Sohar University in the second semester of the academic year 2014-15. The participants were General Foundation Programme elementary level students. In this study, the ‘blend’ consisted of the completion of required materials in classroom and students’ independent self-study phases at a computer with the Cambridge online learning management system (LMS) and conventional face-to-face classroom learning. Two elementary level classes were assigned as experimental and control groups. The students in the experimental class used Cambridge LMS as part of their courses and self-study, as well as following the required materials of the foundation programme. The control class followed only the required materials in a face-to-face environment. The students in both classes were given a pre-test and a post-test. The students in the experimental class were given a student questionnaire followed by a focus group interview in order to investigate their opinions on the blend. In each class, there were 25 Omani female EFL students. They had 18 hours of compulsory instruction per week: 8 hours of listening and speaking class, 8 hours of reading and writing
www.ijmer.in
144
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
and two hours of academic advising. The duration of the course was 4 months. The course book used was ‘Unlock’ level 1 published by Cambridge University for students in the Middle East. The students in the experimental group were given access to Cambridge LMS online work book. The students in the control group did not access the LMS. The resources in the LMS consisted of language exercises, vocabulary activities, listening activities, pronunciation activities, language tests and grammar practice activities. The interaction types in these resources were gap-fill type-in, gap-fill drag and drop, rearranging words, phrases or sentences, multiple choice where students select one choice from a list of two or more options, true/false choices, checklists where students can select more than one choice from a longer list of options, matching words, phrases or sentences and language games. The students could communicate to their peers when they did the online workbook in the computer lab. The LMSalso had forums and blogs enabling social interaction such as chat and discussion boards in which students could share their ideas and help each other online. There was also a messaging feature that enabled teacher–student interaction. The teacher could send messages to the whole class or individual students, and students could send messages to the teacher on LMS. In this study, the students in the experimental group were assigned online homework by the teacheron a daily basis. Students had a chance to study online within a controlled learning environment via this online LMS providing online support materials while they continued to receive face-to-face instruction. The teacher could monitor the progress of students individually and as a whole class. The aim of the online homework was to practise and revise the skills and points covered in the face-to-face lessons. The resources covered in LMS were considered as supplementary to the course materials used in class and matched with the syllabus of the elementary course in a recursive manner. Apart from the assigned resources, students were www.ijmer.in
145
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
also free to work on any other resources available online whenever they wanted. They could play games or work on different kinds of language practice resources. In short, they could use Cambridge LMS for selfstudy as well. The students accessed two workbooks: Reading & Writing and Listening & Speaking. The students were taken to the computer laboratory and given training to use the Cambridge LMS after the study began. In the lab sessions, students were supposed to work on the assigned resources and ask for help with the technical problems they faced in using LMS. The lab sessions were useful in helping students solve technical problems and encouraging them to use LMS. Initially the students faced problems with data input through keyboard as they were not familiar with places of the letters in the English keyboard. It was because the students had learned to use the computer with the Arabic version of Windows Operating System. After a few weeks of practice, most of the students said that they had become familiar with the English keyboard. In this study, learners had a larger space to learn and teachers to teach more effectively. They were not confined to class boundaries any more. While the teacher could help students any time by sending extra resources through the LMS, students could access the materials at any time of day and review them as needed, which provided them with increased flexibility. Many students accessed the LMS through their smartphones with internet connectivity. However, students felt that the data packages offered by the providers were expensive and it restrained their freedom of using the LMS in their Mobile devices. Inclass teaching on its own requires learners to participate in lessons at a fixed time, which limits the access. However, learning does not occur only in class. In this study, apart from the class instruction, learners could reach learning materials and teachers via LMS outside the class. The students could use the computer labs during their break and free time. Students could use the LMS in their mobiles or on their PCs at www.ijmer.in
146
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
home. The videos that were used in the class were available for students to watch in the LMS. This study aimed to explore the effects of Cambridge LMS on Omani EFL foundation programme students’ achievement in Sohar University. The data was collected through the pre-test and post-test. In all of these tests, students were tested on listening, speaking, reading writing and grammar and vocabulary. These tests were administered to both classes on the same day and at the same time. The listening sections of the tests were in the form of MCQs, True or false statements and completing sentences. Grammar was tested with multiple choice cloze tests except for the pre-test in which it was tested with discrete multiple choice items. As for the reading sections, students read a text and answered questions based on it. In the vocabulary section, students chose the correct word from a list of words to fill in the blanks in given sentences. They were also given words to be categorized into different groups. The students had the freedom to revise and correct their wrong answers. V.Data Analysis In this study, the researcher used SPSS 22 to analyze the data. In order to find out any pre-existing difference in achievement, the pre-test scores were compared and revealed no statistical difference between the experimental class and the control class.The descriptive statistics of control and experimental groups’ performance on pre-test is given in Table 1 TABLE 1.DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS OF PRE-TEST N
Minimu m
Maximu m
25
12
32
Experimental group pre-test 25 scores
14
34
Control group pre-test scores
www.ijmer.in
Mea n 21.7 6 22.1 6
Std. Deviation 6.037 6.479
147
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
The score means of control and experimental groups on pre-test were not different from each other. In order to confirm that there is no significant difference between the control and experimental groups regarding their English proficiency, an independent sample t-test was performed. TABLE 2. INDEPENDENT SAMPLE T-TEST OF EXPERIMENTAL AND CONTROL GROUP ON PRE-TEST
t
df
Sig. (2tailed)
.226
48
.822
Mean Difference
Std. Error Difference
.400
1.771
The results showed that that there is no statistical significant difference between experimental and control group (t2, 48 = 0.226, p > 0.01) in their performance on pre-test. Thus, at the beginning of study, the two groups were similar in terms of their English proficiency.The scores of post-test were analyzed to find out whether LMS had an effect on the achievement of students. The results of their performance are illustrated by descriptive statistics of Table 3. TABLE 3. DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS OF POST-TEST Minim N um
Maxim um Mean
Std. Deviation
Experimental group post25 48 test scores
84
64.56
10.685
Control scores
76
53.92
7.582
group
www.ijmer.in
post-test
25 38
148
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
The results showed that the means of experimental and control groups were different. In order to find out whether there was a significant difference between the control and experimental group in their performance on post-test, an independent sample t-test was performed. The results in table 4 shows that that there is a statistically significant difference between experimental and control group (t2, 48 = 4.060, p< 0.01) in their performance in post-test. TABLE 4 INDEPENDENT SAMPLE T-TEST OF EXPERIMENTAL AND CONTROL GROUP ON POST-TEST t
df
Sig. (2-tailed)
Mean Difference
Std. Difference
-4.060
48
.000
-10.640
2.620
Error
In order to determine the participants' achievement after they had received the treatments of study, an independent sample t-test was performed. The results, as is shown in Table 5, indicated that there is a statistically significant difference (t2, 48) = 17.437, p > .001) between the performance of experimental group before and after receiving treatment. In other words, the students English language proficiency improved as a result of blended learning. TABLE 5 INDEPENDENT SAMPLE T-TEST OF THE EXPERIMENTAL GROUP ON POST-TEST
t df 48 17.437
www.ijmer.in
Sig. (2-tailed)
Mean Difference
Std. Difference
.000
-42.800
2.45
Error
149
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
VI.Discussion The analysis of the test results indicated that the experimental class outperformed the control class. Therefore, it is claimed that the students of experimental group that used the LMS achieved significant progress, compared with that of the control group in the traditional classroom teaching model. The hypothesis that the application of blended online instruction has any significant effect on Omani elementary EFL learners' level of language proficiency is proved. The results of the student questionnaire revealed that nearly all of the students considered that LMS helped them improve their English. However, some of them did not want to have an online component in their conventional learning. The analysis of the interviews revealed that the compulsory use of the online materials, the unaffordability of data packages and lack of print materials were important reasons for students’ discontent. VII.Conclusion and Suggestions The results of this study is in line with other similar studies which concluded that computers and online learning environments reinforce EFL student achievement. Blending face-to-face teaching with an online programme as supplementary can be used to improve the achievement of students studying English as a Foreign Language (AlJarf, 2007; Bañados, 2006; Pazio, 2010) Teachers can assign complementary online resources to students to improve their learning and engage them with English outside the class. Incorporating online tools such as an online LMS and authentic materials using mobile phones and other hand held devices can foster student learning. However, the interview results showed that students valued print materials over purely online resources in their learning. We mostly assume that students of our time are technology oriented, we might mistakenly take it for granted that they will appreciate online materials readily. www.ijmer.in
150
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Stracke (2007) suggests that a blended course should be carefully planned, providing students with comprehensive teacher and document guidance. Therefore, when we are designing a blended course, it is very important that we should fine-tune the balance between the online materials and paper-based materials. If students use an online programme for the first time, it will take some time for them to get used to it. They need to be trained to use the online programme. This study was conducted with only female Omani General Foundation Programme students. Future studies could include both the genders focusing on student achievement in specific skills. References 1. Al-Jarf, R. S., 2005. The effects of online grammar instruction on low proficiency EFL college students’ achievement. Asian EFL Journal, 7(4), 166-190. 2. Allan, B., 2007. Blended learning. Facet Publishing, London. 3. Al-Mansour, N. S., & Al-Shorman, R. E. A., 2012. The effect of computer-assisted instruction on Saudi University students’ learning of English. Journal of King Saud University-Languages and Translation, 24(1), 51-56. 4. Bañados, E., 2013. A blended-learning pedagogical model for teaching and learning EFL successfully through an online interactive multimedia environment.Calico Journal, 23(3), 533-550. 5. Beatty, K., 2013. Teaching & researching: Computer-assisted language learning. Routledge. 6. Bilgin, H., 2013. Students’ CALLing: Blended language learning for students.Blended Learning in English Language Teaching: Course Design and Implementation, 207.
www.ijmer.in
151
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
7. Hamilton, M., 2013. Autonomy and foreign language learning in a virtual learning environment. A&C Black. 8. Pazio, M., 2010. Blended learning and its potential in expanding vocabulary knowledge: A case study. Teaching English with Technology, 10(1), 3-30. 9. Sampson, D. G., Isaias, P., Ifenthaler, D., & Spector, J. M. (Eds.)., 2012.Ubiquitous and mobile learning in the digital age. Springer Science & Business Media. 10. Soltani Tehrani, N., & Tabatabaei, O., 2012. The Impact of Blended Online Learning on Iranian EFL Learners' Vocabulary Achievement. ELT Voices–India. 11. Stracke, E., 2007. A road to understanding: A qualitative study into why learners drop out of a blended language learning (BLL) environment. ReCALL,19(01), 57-78. 12. Torrao, S., &Tiirmaa-Oras, S.2007). Blended Learning: Research Reports & Examples of Best Practices. Coordinated by University of Tartu, Estonia. 13. Cambridgelms.org,. (2015). Welcome to the Cambridge LMS. Retrieved 10 July 2015, from http://www.ca mbridgel ms.org /main/p/my_teaching/finished
www.ijmer.in
152
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
WOMEN'S MOVEMENT: AN OVERVIEW Dr. Jaibheem Dhargi Guest Lecturer Department of Women’s Studies Gulbarga University, Kalaburagi Introduction That is evident from the views of various thinkers; there is a difference in the perception of the premise from which the proposition of subordination of women is modern time. For the feminists one of the important aspects has been to understand the various causes for women's subordination. It is true that, the world over, women have a lower status than men-socially, economically, educationally and politically. However, there is a difference in the analysis of the origin of subordinate status of women, the persisting lower status and what strategies are to be adopted and devised to end this subordination. There are different perception has given rise to three major ideological movements and they are. l. Liberal Feminism 2. Radical Feminism 3. Socialist Feminism Liberal Feminism Liberal feminists have championed equal legal and political rights for women to enable them to compete with a man in the public realm on equal terms. The philosophical basis of liberal feminism lies in the principle of individualism and they campaigned for all individuals to participate in public and political life. Mary Wollstonecraft, besides others, is a well-known liberal feminist, famous for her ardent support for women’s causes. Amongst the first systematic and serious works on the subject is "A Vindication of the Rights of Women" published by her in 1792 was the first great feminist treatise. The basic idea of the work www.ijmer.in
153
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
was that women are first and foremost human beings and not sexual beings. Women are rational creatures, capable of governing themselves by reason. Hence, if women are denied natural rights, it must be proved that they have no rational capacity. Wollstonecraft preached that intellect will always govern and sought "to persuade women to endeavour to acquire strength, both of mind and body, and to convince them that the soft phrases, susceptibility of heart, delicacy of sentiment, and refinement of taste, are almost synonymous with epithets of weakness." Liberal feminism flourished in the 1960s but it did not provide more insights into the roots of woman’s subjugated status. The liberals began to enlarge the concept of equality beyond the formal equality in civil and political spheres, to child care facilities, the rights of poor women and women's control over their reproductive life. They advocated improvement in social customs, institutions, laws and attitudes while accepting the existing social structure. According to them, reforms will transform society but radical restructuring is not essential. Radical Feminism Radical feminists have campaigns against a number of things on the grounds of equality for women. Each of these things could be objectionable on grounds of sexual equality only if there were an asymmetry in the way the sexes were treated in respect of them. However there is no such asymmetry for any of these things. What these things do have in common is that, in some way or another, they concern - or bring to attention - the issue of sex. The radical feminist campaign against these things, despite its ostensible concern for women’s equality, is merely an attempt to suppress sex. The beginning of radical feminism coincides with the second phase of feminism around 1969-1910. It is contended that radical www.ijmer.in
154
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
feminism has important ties with liberal feminism, the feminists who spoke of sexual politics. Liberal feminists overlooked the necessary connection between sexual oppression, sexual division of labour and the economic structure, therefore their claims remained reformist. Today, the radical feminists have replaced the struggle for vote and for legal reform with the demand for destruction of patriarchy. The main averment of radical feminists was not only removal of all sex distinctions but also there being no place for men in their lives. Man was considered as an enemy and subordination was seen as bio psychological supremacy of male over female. The radical feminists believed in sexual preference, control over one's body, free sex and collective child care. According to them, masculine hostility manifests itself through rape, pornography and sexual violence. The overthrow of male dominance requires a complete sexual revolution which would destroy traditional sex taboos. Through consciousness raising women should be made aware of this dominance, solidarity among them be developed and they should be made self-reliant so that they are not dependent on men in any sense. Socialist Feminism The thinkers of sociological school prominently Karl Marx and Engels advocated the socialist pattern of movement. The socialistic pattern of society is against capitalism and patriarchy system but the inferior status of women cannot be rooted out unless the concept of communistic society is wiped out. The emergence of concept of private property, confining women to production of children and persistence of gender inequalities caused a great hurdle in women's socialistic movement. Thus, the Marxist theory was found to contain restrictions in terms of political participation /representation of women. Indian social reformers of 19thcentury did approach of the line of liberal movement, campaigning right of education to women so that www.ijmer.in
155
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
women become better mothers and wives and they also campaigned for removal of social evils like Sati, Child marriage, prohibition on widow's re-marriage etc. However, issue of sexual freedom and sexual preference etc could not be agitated as in developed western countries because it is oppose to basic concept of Indian society. According to the socialist view, women's inferior status is rooted in private property, and class-divided society. Sexist ideology and structures such as the family maintain women's inferior status in society. Oppression is inclusive of exploitation but reflects a complex reality. For the socialist feminists it is imperative to understand the operation of hierarchical sexual ordering of society within the class structure. They also feel that overthrow of the capitalist system by itself will not mean transformation of patriarchal ideology. It would be necessary to organise struggles simultaneously against capitalism and patriarchy. Socialist feminists believe that the powerlessness of women in society is rooted to four basic structures: production, reproduction, sexuality and socialisation of children. Family, as the radical feminists observed, was an institution which reinforced women's oppressive condition. Family and economy should not be looked upon as separate systems but as vitally interacting systems. The unequal and hierarchical sex role operates in both the domains, of family and economy. Reference 1. Tong, Rosemarie. 1989. Feminist Thought: A Comprehensive Introduction. Oxon, United Kingdom: Unwin Human Ltd. 2. Bryson, V. (1999): Feminist Debates: Issues of Theory and Political Practice (Basingstoke: Macmillan) pp.14-15
www.ijmer.in
156
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
3. Mills, S. (1998): "Postcolonial Feminist Theory" in S. Jackson and J. Jones eds., Contemporary Feminist Edinburgh University Press) pp.98-112
Theories (Edinburgh:
4. Buchanan, Ian. "Socialist Feminism." A Dictionary of Critical Theory. Oxford Reference Online. Oxford University Press. 5. The Radical Women Manifesto: Socialist Feminist Theory, Program and Organizational Structure[1], Red Letter Press, 2001
www.ijmer.in
157
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
A CRITICAL REVIEW ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC STUDY OF WEAVERS IN HYDERABAD KARANATAK
Sanjeev Kumar G Kudri Research Scholar Department of Sociology Gulbarga University Kalaburagi, Karnataka
Dr. Jaikishan Thakur Associate Professor in Sociology & Research Guide Govt. First Grade College Mahagaon Cross ,Kalaburagi
Introduction: Weaving is one of the oldest skills known to humans, dating back to pre-historic times. Clothes have given a distinct identity to almost all ancient civilizations of the world. India especially stands out in this regard. It has a glorious past in the production of textiles and was especially renowned for printed textiles. The use of printing blocks in India goes as far back as 3000 B.C. and some historians are of the view that it may have been the original home of textile printing. India has been making cotton cloth since time immemorial. The entire process of manufacture of cloth was initially done by weavers at their own home with the help of their family members. Cotton was bought directly from farmers. The weaver and his family would gin the cotton to separate the fibre from the seeds, card it to make it fluffy and then spin it into thread or yarn on their spinning wheels. The yarn was woven into cloth on a loom and then dyed to give it beautiful colours. All this was done at home. The weaver and his family would work at whatever time suited them. When it became very hot, the yarn began to snap due to the heat and then they would stop working. They could also take break if they had some other work like going to the market. When the cloth was ready, weaver sold it to a merchant who came to the village or himself took it to the town or the weekly village market to sell that cloth which is the outcome of hard work of almost all the members of the family. He would sell it at wherever the best price he got and thus the weaver family earned its livelihood. During the mid-19th century weaving was mostly done with handlooms. Weavers had to undergo a complex process of maintaining designs in the textile. It was the time of the Industrial Revolution in Europe, where everyday entrepreneurs were coming up with new inventions. Joseph Marie Jacquard, a weaver and entrepreneur from France, realized that weaving tapestry was a delicate and repetitive proves. So, in 1804, he designed an improved loom, now known across the world as the Jacquard loom. The www.ijmer.in
158
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
functioning of the loom was governed by a series of punch cards. Interestingly, this technology later laid the foundation for the development of computers. The Jacquard loom traveled to India probably during British times and soon became the preferred choice of weavers as they could create com0plex designs with much less labour. It also reduced the cost of cloth and brought it within the reach of the lower classes. Today, the Jacquard loom is used in various parts of India to produce cloth for products like tapestry, upholstery. Jacquard weaving is found in almost all parts of the country where handloom exists. In terms of products, it is used in weaving ordinary cloth for tapestries, draperies, to the complex products like silk saris, shawls, scarfs and other similar apparel. The textiles of India are as diverse as its culture. Nearly four million handlooms are engaged in weaving fabrics of nearly 23 different varieties. The Handloom Census of India, undertaken in 1987-88, places the number of group of artisans in India. Providing direct and indirect employment to more than 30 lakh weavers, the handloom production is the largest economic activity second only to agriculture in India. Handlooms contribute nearly 23% of the total cloth produced in the country. During the year 1996-97, a total production of 7235 million sq. meters of cloth was achieved. The Handloom Act passed by the parliament in 1985 aims to shield handloom weavers against power loom and textile mill operators by reserving certain textile articles (presently eleven in number) for exclusive production by handlooms. Indian History: India has one of the richest traditions in this creative activity from Kashmir to Kanyakumari, Kuchch to Kohima. The weaving device – the loom – has been subject to constant hostile threats of being extinguished by the highly mechanized, organized, machinery – dominated textile industry for over a century and in recent decades, by the advent of the power loom. If the handloom has survived, it is because of its highly elastic range of adaptation in meeting communities; needs and in its ability to produce exquisite fabrics which mills cannot produce in spite of all their sophisticated technologies. For centuries both the spinning and weaving processes were traditionally carried out by hand n the home on a cottage industry basis – weaving by men and spinning by women. Over a period of time to cater to market demand for most fabrics other than Khadi, the spinning of yarn changed to a machine process. On the basis of this distinction, handloom fabrics can be broadly categorized in two types. Hnad spun, hand woven: Khadi is hand spun and hand woven fabric and Machine spun, hand woven: all other handlooms fall under this category.
www.ijmer.in
159
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Regional History: Weaving is practiced in many different regions in India. Each are has its own particular style, using traditional designs and motifs. Cotton is woven all over India. Apart from basic plain-weave fabric that is found in many placesk, one can take note of a few places for their distinctive weave. No matter how small or ordinary a weave may seem; it has its own distinctive character. The thousands of towns and villages where handlooms turn out huge quantities of material cater mainly to the common local people. The men need longish pieces of fabric to use as dhotis to wrap around the lower part of the body; durable material for jackets; a wrap on the body (chaddar) and lengths of fabric for the turban. This ranges from a rectangular piece to a two yards’ length for turbans are found in countless types and offer an immense potential for ingenuity, style and taste. The women use large skirts, stoles or saris and blouses. Cloth is also woven for shirts, pajamas and children’s garments. All of these vary greatly from region to region. For instance while the lungi (sarong) is widely prevalent from north to south, it has many version. In the extreme south only white lungis are worn. But starting from Andhra Pradesh right up to Punjab, brightly coloured and intricately designed lungis can be seen. In countless villages ad towns across the country, the sari countinues to be the garment worn by the majority of women. Significant inroads have been made by machine made textiles. Yet the preference for traditional saris for ritual or every day use Is none of the strongest reasons for the continued existence of a large proportion of the country’s handlooms. In Tamil Nadu and Andhra Pradesh, where inexpensive cotton saris are produced, even the simplest has a dignity lent by very broad borders on either side, or a singly decorative touch of a heavily patterned pallu the sari and which falls over the shoulder at the back. The distinguishing mark is what is known as korvari, the solid border where the weft threads of the field do not enter into the borders. Kerala has a distinctive sari type known as Karalkuda. Similar styles in colour are also produced in Coimbatore and Madurai in Tamil Nadu, Chanderi in Madhya Pradesh, and Venkatagiri in Andhra Pradesh. This has a grand look with its sheer body and gold designs like dots, coins, leaves, parrots or simple geometrical patterns on the body. The Maheshwar sari, mostly in cotton is characterized by its simplicity yet with a few singular touches takes on an irresistible charm. Gadwal and Kothakota near Vanaparti in Andhra Pradesh weave fine cotton saris with rich gold borders and heavy panel-like pallus. Cotton saris with richly woven pallus and gold borders in opulent designs are made in places like Siddhipet and Armoor in Andhra Pradesh, which used to make them in silk. Now they also manufacture curtains, bedspreads, etc., using the www.ijmer.in
160
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
old decorative motifs for ornamentation. Amongst elaborate styles in cotton weaving is Jamdani. Karnataka History: Eventually dress makes man is an undisputable proverb in our modern world. Textile management, dress designing, fashion shows and what not? Surely, dress can tell us about the ethnicity, culture and attitude of a person who wear it. Every region has its own traditional attire. As we know very well, dress is not a mere piece of cloth. It needs so much of colour sense and creativity to fulfill our fashion needs. In the midst of all these chaos, some dress-forms catch our hearts with its excellence. The weavers here have their roots in Mysore of Karnataka state. Then rulers of Kollengode and Cochin invited the weavers to be the official weavers of the royal family and offered a suitable shelter here at Kuthampully. This is a story of 500 years old. These people belong to Devanga Community. Devanga community is a folk in south India who engaged in weaving. Even though their origin is in Karnataka, this generation born and brought up here in Kerala. But surprisingly, they imbibed into Tamil culture. Their customs and festivals resemble Tamil style. They are devotees of Chamundeshwari amma. And, there is two temples here in the street dedicated to their goddess. The festival falls on February every year. There are around 1000 families, engaged in weaving, still keeps the glory of their ancestors. Another big center is Shahpur in Belgaum district, Karnataka state. While Maheshwar is are normally in bright colours. Shahpuris specialize in soft pastels or shots of two colours: one in the warp, another in the weft, with matching colours in the border and the pallu. Poona has its distinctive sari with a gold thread speckled panel for the pallu and a narrow gold patterned border. From Hubli-Dharwar to Bijapur in Karnataka state, cotton saris are made in dark earthy colours, which mark them out. There is a special sari in this area known as Irkal after the village in Bijapur district, from which it seems to have originated. Large quantities of yardage in the Irkali style are produced for blouses in a little village called Guledgudda near Irkal, and supplied to markets all over. Irkali style saris in finer counts are also made in Narayanpet in Andhra Pradesh. Irkalis are rich in their colouring with colours like the special pomegranate red, brilliant peacock blue, parrot green. The rasta design has horizontal lines in subtle matching colours running through the body of the sari with charming effect.
www.ijmer.in
161
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Weaving Concept: Weaving is a method of fabric production in which two distinct sets of yarns or threads are interlaced at right angles to form a fabric or cloth. The other methods are knitting, lace making, felting and braiding or plaiting. The longitudinal threads are called the warp and the lateral threads are the weft or filling. (weft or woof is an old English word meaning “that which is woven”). The method in which these threads are interwoven affects the characteristics of the cloth. Cloth is usually woven on a loom, a device that holds the warp threads in place while filling threads are woven through them. A fabric hand which meets this definition of cloth (warp threads with a weft thread winding between) can also be made using other methods, including tablet weaving, back-strap, or other techniques without looms. The way the warp and filling threads interlace with each other is called the weave. The majority or woven products are created with one of three basic weaves: plain weave, satin weave, or twill. Woven cloth can be plain (in one colour or a simple pattern), or can be woven in decorative or artistic designs. In general, weaving involves using a loom to interlace two sets of threads at right angles to each other: the warp which runs longitudinally and the weft (older woof) that crosses it. One warp thread is called an end and one weft thread is called a pick. The warp threads are held taut and in parallel to each other, typically in a loom. There are may types of looms. Weaving can be summarized as a repetition of these three actions, also called the primary motion of the loom. 1. Shedding: where the ends are separated by raising or lowering heald frames (heddles) form a clear space where the pick can pass. 2. Picking: where the weft or pick is propelled across the loom by hand, an air-jet, a rapier or a shuttle. 3. Beating-up or battening: where the weft is pushed up against the fell of the cloth by thread. Review of Literature: Wayne parsons, 2004: The whole process of royal weaving is comprised never to allow temperature natures to be separated from the brave, but to weave them together, like the warp and the woof by common sentiments and honour and reputation, and smooth and even web, to entrust to them the offices of state.
www.ijmer.in
162
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
This article explores the theory and practice of building policy capacity and coherence and in particular focuses on its epistemological and ontological aspects and assumptions. It argues that designing for capacity and coherence has been overwhelmingly concerned with improving the instrumental rationality of policy-making through a more systematic and strategic use of knowledge. However, author argue that this instrumentalism has meant that designing has worked within a very lightly constructed epistemological regime which has tended to neglect non-instrumentalist approaches to policy knowledge and learning some of these review non-instrumentalist approaches and suggest that they provide both a critique of the dominant paradigm and offer alternative ways of framing the problem of building policy capacity and coherence. Lynn Stephen, 2005: Fieldwork in the Zapotec textile-producing community of Teotitlan del Valle from 2000 to 2004 suggests that indigenous responses to increased economic globalization and Mexico’s neo liberal economic policies do not always involve solutions of individualization, but can also generate collective efforts. From the late 1980s, textile co-operatives were first organized by women and most recently by men and women to such a degree that by the summer of 2004 about 15 per cent of the local households were involved in textile co-operatives. In an attempt to bypass local merchant control of the textile industry and to gain political and cultural rights in their community and in the global market as independent artisans, these women pioneered a new era in gender relations. Kathleeen M.Brown, 2004: Although many agree that theory, research, and practice should be intertwined to support the type of schooling (and society) that values rather than marginalizes, few scholars offer groundbreaking, pragmatic approaches to developing truly transformative leaders. From a critical theorist perspective, this article offers a practical, processoriented model that is responsive to the challenges of preparing educational leaders committed to social justice and equity. “By weaving a tripartite theoretical framework together in support of an alternative, transformative pedagogy, students learn to perceive social, political, and economic contradictions and to take action against the oppressive elements of reality”. The three theoretical perspectives of Adult Learning Theory, Transformative Learning Theory, and Critical Social Theory are interwoven with the three pedagogical strategies of critical reflection, rational discourse, and policy praxis to increase awareness, acknowledgment, and action within preparation programmes. The end of textile and clothing quotas a year ago has opened new dorrs for exporters, but it has also sharply intensified competition. Will India follow China’s lead and record significant gains in market share? Not without substantial further reforms, say the authors of new IMF Working Paper www.ijmer.in
163
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Temporary constraints on Chinese exports may shield India in the near term, but if it is truly compete, India must step up reforms and improve the sector’s efficiency. Savita Modak, 2006: Fabindia clearly shows that its success as a major player in the retail handloom sector in India is due to the fact that the company has always believed in good business practices and never compromised on best quality. Aruna M, 2006: Urmul Trust is an example of how an agency that concentrates on developmental issues can take up handloom weaving as a major income generation activity. N.Marie Dries, 2005: Spinning is a complete exercise in frustration until you start to get it, explained Judy Newland last semester, as students watched her feed wool onto the bobbin of her spinning wheel. After demonstrating how to work the foot pedals. Newland encouraged each class member to try running the machine. The activity was a key element in a class which Judy Newland , an assistant professor of museum studies, co-taught with Kim Mills, and instructor of anthropology. Weaving Cultural Connections incorporated elements from anthropology, museum studies, history, economics, and art. It was born out of a conversation that Newland and Mills began more than a year earlier, while participating in a summer workshop that promoted interdisciplinary class development. Newland, who has been weaving for more than 25 years, discussed her avocation with Mills, who has collected textile samples from around the world. Together they designed a course that used textiles as the foundation for examining colonization, gender relations, popular culture, and tradition. “Anthropologists often use everyday objects as a starting point for examining cultures,” Mills explains. “Textiles provide a particularly fertile arena for study because such everyday objects may have economic, social, and family history. Many times there are stories attached to textiles. For example, in some cultures textiles connect generations through dowries and trousseaus. When parents teach their children how to create textiles, they are also socializing children to the culture.” In the course of the semester, the class examined textile traditions in Asia, Central America, India, the Middle East, and the United States. They read chapters from a book titled Cloth and Human Experience and supplementary texts and articles, watched films from around the world, and welcomed visitors to share their expertise. “We just scratched the surface of understanding the cultures and their textiles,” admits Newland. The depth of available information is incredible; we could easily develop an entire course around just one country or technique. Ana M.Carmiol, et al, 2007: In Weaving Generations Together, Greenfield describes a long-term project spanning two generations of mothers teaching their daughters how to weave. The author considers the economic and social changes that took place in the Mayan village of Nabenchauk www.ijmer.in
164
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
between the 1970s and the 1990s, and explains how they affected weaving apprenticeship and the creative and cognitive processes involved in it. We sympathize with ‘this situated analysis of learning, creativity and cognition, and applaud Greenfield’s unique contribution to the understanding of human development under shifting socio-economic circumstances. At the same time, we highlight the need to enrich the author’s account in two distinct ways: (1) by favouring a developmental perspective to the study of changes in practices and psychological phenomena that involves the analysis of processes of transformation and not only the description of differences observed across time; and (2) by specifying the relationship between cultural practices and internal processes. A call is also made to further the discussion about the assumptions that underlie the author’s socio-cultural approach. Hilda Kean, et al, 2003: Standard economic histories dealing with the silk-weaving industry in nineteenth-century Spitalfield and Bethnal Green have conventionally told of a slow and terminal decline. These accounts have also informed and reflected influential social and cultural histories of East London that tell similar tales of a community experiencing massive discontinuity, deprivation and decay. This article critically examines such narratives by developing the authors’ recent study of census returns for a number of streets in a small area of nineteenth-century Bethnal Green and augmenting them through detailed readings of a range of other contemporary institutional and administrative records for the same area. From these materials the authors have been able to construct an intriguing series of individual and family stories, many of which tend to challenge and disrupt much that has been written about the area and its inhabitants. Rather than endorsing conventional accounts of industrial decline, demographic instability and social dislocation, these new narratives often depict a highly cohesive and stable community, with strong social and cultural ties and tradition, and a remarkable consistency in both its employment and geographical attachment. The authors suggest that their approach provides a basis for constructing new maps and stories of lives in nineteenth-century Bethnal Green. In a more general sense, the article also demonstrates how relatively under-utilized materials such as the census can be used imaginatively and creatively in constructing narratives of communities and areas in the past. Erin Mortion, 2011: This article will examine the career of weaver and occupational therapist Mary E.Black (1885-1988) by suing her life as a lens through which to explore the intersection of arts and crafts revivalism with occupational therapy in early twentieth-century northeastern North America. Born in Massachusetts, Black grew up in and was educated in Wolfville, Nova Scotia. She trained as Ward’s aide in Montreal in 1919 and worked in a string of hospitals and sanitariums throughout the united States and Nova Scotia. Indeed, Black understood her work as an occupational therapist and what she www.ijmer.in
165
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
described as “the therapeutics of weaving” to be intertwined. Like many arts and crafts revivalists of her period, Black saw the teaching of skilled craft making as a means to generate self-sufficiency, since it provided a way for displaced and injured people to make salable goods in the face of industrialization, war, and inadequate medical care. In Black’s case, the utopian social mission of the new professional field of occupational therapy provided just the institutional means to disseminate the remunerative qualities of craftwork on a broad scale. Andreagarcia, et al 2012: A decade ago, the subtractive schooling of many Latino youth in the United States resulted in a devaluing of cultural identity and heritage as resources to support learning. Today, educators are urged to revalue cultural resources toward literacy development. This study explores the experiences of Latina adolescent students as writers during an after-school writing project based in a culturally and linguistically responsive literacy instruction model. We report on the writing experiences of young women from diverse backgrounds as they examined issues of race, power, voice, and linguistic identity through the use of culturally authentic literature. Qualitative analyses of data from writing samples reveal (a) the process of Latina youth “authoring” themselves through writing and (b) the composing of meaning from a “transnational” perspective. We address implications for the education of minority youth. Ch.Victoria Devi, 2012: This article explores the women weavers of Manipur by using both qualitative and quantitative techniques. In mainstream India, males play the major role in weaving while women are involved in preweaving activity. In contrast to this, in the north-eastern states of India, especially Manipur, the weaving occupation is dominated by women, who often perform the dual roles of producer and trader. There are no power looms or cloth mills in the state even today, and these women weavers are to be credited for preserving Manipuri’s heritage by laboriously producing traditional textiles by hand. Globalization and the opening of global markets may require their skills and knowledge to be upgraded to face the competition and this study is an attempt to understand the world of the women weavers of Manipur in the context of a changing society. Their integral role in an industrially backward state is reflected in the lives of the 300 women selected for this study, which examines their socio-economic conditions; the advantages and disadvantages associated with their working conditions; aspects of the their health, wages and aspirations; their social relations with family and community; as well as the changing market structure, the technology used and production. Thus, an exploration of the women weavers’ lives becomes a matter of acknowledging their contribution to society in the performance of their duties and roles according to their capacity, culture and traditions.
www.ijmer.in
166
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
T. Apparao, et al, 2012: Suicides of handloom weavers drew lot of attention from various sectors in recent years. But the phenomenon is not uniform in all the waving centres. There is no evidence of suicides in certain places despite the insecurity in earning livelihood. The root cause for suicides of handloom weavers is the development of mill sector and the failure of handloom weavers to compete with it. It is believed that the successful coping mechanisms have played a crucial role in avoiding livelihood crisis and suicides. At this juncture, it is very important to evaluate coping strategies and their impact on the livelihood of weavers. The article tries to explore the similarities and differences in the coping strategies of two castes of weavers and try to understand their consequences. Statement of the Problem: As part of the international commitment to achieve the Millennium Development Goals, UNIDO is strongly dedicated to reducing poverty through promotion of productive activities. Since most industries in developing countries consist predominantly of micro, small and medium enterprises (MSMEs), specific approaches are called for to promote the competitiveness and the capabilities of these firms. One of such tools is cluster development. It focuses on targeting a large number of MSMEs that are located in geographical proximity and can thus specialize in interrelated activities. Promoting the firms of a cluster does not however automatically translate into poverty reduction, unless an explicit pro-poor focus is adopted. Thus, UNIDO provides support to clusters whose development has the potential to benefit poor people the most and in implements these interventions to maximize their pro-poor impact. One such project has been recently implemented in the handloom cluster of Barpalli located in the western part of Orissa in India. The cluster included * villages located in the district of Bargarh and comprises approximately 1367 looms, or 68% of the total in the district. The production process in this cluster is highly labour intensive and marginalized segments of the society (such as women and scheduled castes) play an important role in this process. These features of production were linked to underlying social issued. The fact that whole families were integrated in the production process and that most of production was taking place in the houses of the weavers meant that in order to promote the development of the cluster and particularly the poorer segments, a join social-economic approach needs to be adopted. For instance, improving the health conditions in the cluster, while an important objective in itself, was found to be also crucial in increasing productivity. www.ijmer.in
167
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Indeed, due to poor health conditions, weavers were forced to interrupt production and incurred high expenses for medicine and treatment which, in turn, negatively impacted on the saving abilities of these families. By the same token, improving the housing condition was key to generate a more suitable environment for production and, thus, increasing the productivity in the cluster. One of the main constrains facing weavers was limited access to credit and lack of collateral to obtain loans. The other interventions were designed to improve the production process and raise the productivity. A program to provide training for semi-skilled weavers was initiated and assisted by UNIDO. The intervention measures to improve the health conditions in the cluster were also needed. First, the intervention must be focused on the building of latrines to improve sanitation. In addition, poor families were encouraged to enroll in a health insurance scheme as this would reduce their expense on medical treatment and, thus, raise their ability to save and invest. Efforts must also be made to undertaken to improve the housing condition in the cluster in order to ensure the weavers a better working environment. Hence, researcher has made an attempt to under take weavers profession at a risk of sustainability by considering the following objectives and hypothesis for present research study. Significance of the study: Already seriously threatened by the unequal competition from power looms, the very survival of the handloom sector and handloom weavers has now been imperiled by the sharp rise in prices of yarn and dyes – the result of the economic reform programmes all out emphasis on pushing up exports unmindful of the domestic economic and social crisis. Thotavaripalem and andrapeta in the vicinity of Chirala town and Mangalagiri were in news for the starvation deaths of weavers in 1991 when crisis loomed large over the handloom sector following the sudden spurt in the prices of cotton yarn and chemical dyes, throwing thousands of weavers into unemployment, starvation, disease and death. The severity of the crisis was evident in the fact that between September and November 1991 and around 110 weavers were identified to have either committed suicide or died of starvation. The report of starvation deaths from Koyalagudem (Nalgonda district), Addepalli (Guntur district) and Mangalagiri evoke a sense of variety of problems plague the weaving units, but there is a common thread in the stories they narrate; of high input costs and an unpredictable market. Their traditional occupation is thus increasingly unviable.
www.ijmer.in
168
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Tall promises made by the government, such as providing loans at an interest rate of 3 percent a year, seem to have reached very few weavers since most have no assets to pledge. Many turn to moneylenders in desperation, despite exorbitant interest rates. In fact, many have abandoned weaving to take up jobs as garment workers, drivers or security personnel. By some estimates, over three-fourths of the power looms in the State are not functional. In the urban areas where the availability of alternative sources of livelihood is relatively better, low wages and continual insecurity in the handloom sector has forced the youth to abandon their family vocation. For instance, in the predominantly weaver colonies of Karawan, Katedan, Hussainalam and Sultanshahi in the old city of Hyderabad. we find only the late middle aged men and women still continuing to eke out a livelihood from weaving while the younger generation has settled as shop assistants, autorickshaw drivers and construction labourers where average daily earnings are much higher. Thus, it is the need of the hour to take stock of weaver from the Hyderabad Karnataka region particularly Yadgir and Gulbarga district. Objectives: 1. 2. 3. 4.
To know the socio-economic background of weavers. To study the weavers struggle for survival. To understand the health conditions of weavers. To investigate the factors responsible for the break down of weaving profession. 5. To know the impact of weaving on family condition. Hypothesis: 1. People who were involved in traditional weaving process may found to be socio economically weaker then that of their counter parts who were involved in modern technological weaving product. 2. The health conditions of the traditional weavers may found to be worst in comparison to the modern weaver professionalists. 3. Societal Development of the traditional weavers might be less sustainable than that of the modern weavers. 4. Lesser demand for local products and increasing financial crisis might be foreign the traditional weavers to leave their hereditary profession and look for the other jobs. 5. The Union and state Governments might have come out with few policy interventions to support and sustain the local and small scale industries particularly weaving community in the race of global competition. www.ijmer.in
169
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Research Methodology: The present study being an exploratory and diagnostic one for these major weaving families of Gulbarga district will randomly select for the study. In order to collect the required primary data from the respondents, three stage sampling design will be adopted i.e., house listing, sampling method and sample size. Further the 450 Interview Schedules will be served while interviewing the respondents. For more detailed investigation, qualitative research techniques will also be used and lastly, necessary multiple statistical tools will also be applied with the help of computer to analyze the data in a scientific way. Previous studies, books, journals, magazines, online information etc. will be the secondary sources of data. Results and Discussion: 1. As far as the caste status of the respondents is concerned 88.2% belonged to the Nekar caste (Lingayat). 11.8% of the respondents belonged to the Muslims. So, it can be mentioned at this point of time that only weavers belonging to the traditional weaving families. 2. 97.3% of the respondents got traditional education about the weaving. Only 1.8% of the respondents received the technical knowledge about the weaving. 0.9% of them have received non-technical education. 3. 93.6% of the respondents are married and 6.4% of them are unmarried. It reveals that a very big majority of the respondents have got the responsibility of the family. These respondents had burden of wife, children and other members of the family. 4. 98.4% of the respondents had weaving as their traditional occupation and 1.6% them are influenced by the local merchants to take up this occupation. It indicates that almost all the respondents pursuing this profession, because it is their traditional occupation. 5. Majority of the respondents i.e., 55.55% of them are pursuing this profession single handedly. It means that only one person of the family bearing the responsibility of entire family. 11.11% of respondents pursuing weaving in their families with the help of 2 members. That is both husband and wife. 22.22% respondents had nearly 4 members doing this profession and again 11.11% of them had all the members of the family engaged in weaving. 6. Income of 85.5% of the respondents is less than Rs.25000/- as their annual income. 8.7% of them are having income of Rs.25000/- to Rs.50000/-. 3.8% and 2% of the respondents had the income of
www.ijmer.in
170
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Rs.50000/- to Rs.100000/- and above Rs.100000/- respectively. It shows that majority of the respondents are leading the life in poverty. 7. 85.1% of the respondents’ family had 2 to 3 earning members. 6% had 4 to 5 members and 8.9% of the respondents had only 1 member as the earning member in the family. It is the positive element, because more number of the families had 2 to 3 earning members. 8. 87.1% of the respondents have weaving as their primary source of income and for 10.9% of them this is not a primary source of income. It reveals that more number of the weaving families had only one source of income to fulfill the requirements of their family members. Only 10.9% of the respondents are having weaving as the secondary source of income. It denotes that these weaving families are not at depending upon the weaving profession. 9. In 54.9% of the weaving families apart from the family members one person is engaged in this work as labour. 41.6% had 2 persons as labourers and 3.6% of them afford to have 3 labourers. It indicates that majority of the respondents are not in a position to engage more that one labour in their production work. 10. Even in the present modern and educated society 92% of the respondents are still pursuing manual weaving and a very small percent of them had automatic weaving. To put this in other words, 6% of them are producing cloth with the help of automatic weaving system and only 2% of the respondents are having semi-automatic system. 11. Most of the weavers are of the view that their income from weaving is not sufficient i.e., 43.6% of the respondents do not feel that the income what they are receiving out of the weaving is not sufficient and 27.6% of them felt it as not at all sufficient. A less number of the families i.e., 28.9% of the weaving families are of the opinion that the income from weaving is sufficient for them to lead the life. 12. 54.4% of the respondents want to improve their income by getting better markets for their products. 4.9% of them would like to increase their income by increase in the production. 3.1% of the respondents said that it can be improved with the help of improving quality of the product and 35.8% of them felt that by taking all above mentioned steps they are in position to improve their income. 13. 78.4% of the weavers are not the members of any co-operative society and 21.6% of them are the members of the weavers’ co-operative society. It indicates that still lot of awareness should be created among www.ijmer.in
171
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
the weavers to become the members of these societies so that they can get lot help and proper guidance from the trained members of the society. 14. In regard to the type of goods weaving families are exclusively producing, 12% of the respondents are engaged in the production of sarees, 10.4% are producing dhotis, 5.8% are producing bed spreads and 67.8% of them engaged themselves in the production of lungis and towels. By this available data we can say that large number of weavers are producing only lungis and towels in the region. 15. 79.7% of the respondents have not added any new varieties in their line of production, because of lack of supply of raw material and economic reason. 4% of them felt that there is no encouragement for this. 1.8% of the respondents are of the view that they do not have skill to produce other products than the present one. Again 14.5% of the respondents unable to add new products due to the lack of equipments which are required for this purpose. 16. 90.2% of the weaving families have dropped the production of existing products and only 8.2% of them are continued with the same products. It happens because of fact that most of the respondents are facing the problem of supply of raw material. 17. As far as the market for weaved products is concerned 68.7% of the respondents are having access to the indirect marketing and 31.3% of them depending upon others for the sale of their produced goods. It shows that most of the weaving families are selling their products to shop owners or the whole sale dealers. 18. Majority of the respondents who have accessibility to indirect marketing are selling products to the government agencies. That is 94.8% of the weavers are selling their goods to the government agencies rather than the private merchants. Most of them are doing this sale business on credit. 19. 87.1% of the respondents have to wait for more than 40 days to recover the amount of sold goods. 6% of them recovering the amount within 15 days. So, majority of the weaving families are made to wait for the recovery of money for a longer period. 20. 82.9% of the weavers very much loyal in their business. Because all these weaving families are not selling their goods to other than the promised one even in the doubtfulness of recovering earlier payments. This shows that almost all the weaving families are leading their by
www.ijmer.in
172
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
inculcating very good values of the business. Now it is left to the buyers to act properly. 21. As far as the working conditions are concerned 79.6% of the respondents are forced to pursue their weaving in bad working condition. 20.4% of them had good working condition. 22. 81.1% of the respondents are facing problems like lack of proper equipments, no natural light and more time is consumed in the process of producing their goods. Hence, it shows that majority of the weaving families are continuing this profession even in the trouble some situation. 23. In regard to the health problems faced by the weavers in the process of production is more. 93.4% of the respondents are facing lot of health problems. 6.6% of them are not at all suffering from the health problems. This is may be because of the good working condition. 24. Majority of the respondents i.e., 39.5% of them are having asthama. 27.2% are suffering from respiratory health problems, 3.6% skin problems, 23.1% eye problems and 6.6% of the respondents are from other than the diseases mentioned above. 25. 79.8% of the weavers are not having the coverage of insurance for their health problems. 20.2% of the respondents are covered with one or the other type of health insurance. More number of the weaving families have covered themselves because of the fact that they have to pay high premiums for the insurance cover. 26. 98.4% of the respondents feel that weaving business is declining in this area. It is a alarming situation for the weaving families as well as to the government. Because of the reason that more number of the families are not having any type of hope of reviving their profession of weaving. 27. 51.1% of the respondents who have manual weaving system feel that high cost of production is responsible for the decline of weaving industry in the region. 46.9% of the weavers are of the view that existing handlooms are producing very less number of units compare to power looms. 2% of them have given other reasons for this. 28. 83.% of the respondents are not satisfied with the supply of yarn due to so many reasons. 16.2% of them are satisfied with the supply of the yarn. Among those who are not satisfied with this either due to bad quality of yarn or high price of yarn. 8.2% of the weaving families are not satisfied due to the bad quality of yarn, 5.6% due to high price, 23.3% due to the untimely supply of yarn and majority of the www.ijmer.in
173
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
respondents i.e., 61.3% of them are not satisfied with the supply of yarn due to all the above reasons. 29. 94.2% of the respondents are not getting any support from the NGOs of the region and only a 5.8% of them are supported by the NGOs. It indicates that the role of NGOs in the support for weaving families has to be taken care of. In other words NGOs should take keen interest in supporting the weavers. 30. On asking whether your children continue the weaving business, 94% of the respondents answered negatively. Only 6% of the respondents are interested in continuing their family business. It reveals that lot of encouragement and support is required for this business. Conclusion It can be concluded from the collected data that 79.5% of the respondents are in the young and middle age group. It reveals that if some measures are taken for the improvement of the weaving industry, the young and middle aged grouped weavers will get inspiration to work hard for the improvement of their production units. 18.4% of them are very young i.e., they are below 30 years of age. Hence, for the revival of this industry some encouragement is required either from the government agencies or from the NGOs. In relation to the sex ratio of the respondents 60.9% of them are males and 39.1% of the weavers are females. It is suggested that more and more females are encouraged to pursue this profession. Because it will reduce the burden of male members of the family. In turn it will help the weaving family a lot. On the other hand it has been find out that females are more dedicated towards their work. It is also suggested that almost all the respondents of the region should be given technical education of producing goods. It does not mean that they are not well versed with the production of cloth. But in order to compete in this competitive world one has to get upgraded himself in the field in which he is engaged. That is why it is considered as a very important suggestion made by the researcher. References 1. Thomas F. Golob; Wilfred W. Recker: Veroniica M. Alvarez, Transportation Research Part A: Policy and Practice. Vol. 38; No.1: year 2004. 35-51. 2. Wayne Parsons, Australian Journal of Public Administration. Vol 63; No 1; Year 2004. 43-57. 3. Charles Kurzman, International Journal of Middle East Studies. Vol 37; No 2; Year 2005. 137-166.
www.ijmer.in
174
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
4. Patricia Marks Greenfield, Cultural Survival Quarterly. Vol 29; No 1; Year 2005. 5. Lynn Stephen, Critique of Anthropology. Vol 25; Year 2005. 253-278. 6. Kathleen M. Brown, Educational Administration Quarterly. Vol 40; No 1; Year 2004. 77-108. 7. Psychology of Women Quarterly. Vol 29: No4; Year 2005. 453-454. 8. IMF Survey. Vol 35; No 1; Year 2006. 9. Savita Modak, Economic and Political Weekly. Vol 41; No 31; Year 2006. 10. Aruna M, Economic and Political Weekly. Vol 41; No 31; Year 2006. 11. Adelaide Review. Year 2006. 12. Jennifer Wilhoit; Tara Tidwell Cullen, Cultural Survival Voices. Vol 4; No 2; Year 2006. 13. Deniz Yukseker, International Journal of Urban and Regional Research. Vol 31; No 1; Year 2007. 60-72. 14. N.Marie Dries, Beloit college Magazine. No 1; Year 2005. 15. Jonathan, Eva G.; Silva, Taissa M.R.Da, Psicologia & Sociedade. Vol 19; No 1; Year 2007. 77-84.
www.ijmer.in
175
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
PRELIMINARY STUDIES ON STRUCTURAL WOOD IN URBAN SYSTEMS
Syeda Qaseem Fatima Department of Zoology Gulbarga University Kalaburgi, Karnataka
M.Rajashekhar Department of Zoology Gulbarga University Kalaburgi, Karnataka
K.Vijaykumar Department of Zoology Gulbarga University Kalaburgi, Karnataka
Introduction Termites, thus, have a great economic impact on wood used in and around the buildings. However, it is difficult to establish the exact cost of termite damage and control. Further, the undetected or unchecked termite damage may result in large reported monetary loss. Many investigators have estimated the cost of termite control and repair of damaged wood (Lund, 1967; Ebeling, 1968, Johnston et al., 1972). Rizk et. al., (1982) and Khalil et al., (1982) reported damage due to termites in Egypt. Roonwal (1979) reported loss incurred due to termite damage to structural-wood in India. However, no other literature is available on these aspects. The abiotic environmental factors influence the foraging activity and thus, the structural-wood destroying activity of termites (Waller and La Fage, 1987). Atmospheric temperature and relative humidity and rainfall play a vital role in the survival of termites. Nests in all termites including the wood inhabiting ones provide an insulated environment for the inhabitants and their thermoregulation is governed by the nest's location internal construction and size (SenSarma, 1988). In Macrotermes species and Odontotermes species, www.ijmer.in
176
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
architecture of the mound seems to play the most crucial role in thermoregulation (Sen-Sarma, 1988). Experiments have shown that air temperature and moisture content of available timber are the most important factors influencing the activity of dry wood termites (Williams, 1976; Steward, 1981, 1982). Sen-Sarma (1988) have provided an excellent account of relative humidity inside the mound of Neotermes exitosus and have reported that 96% of relative humidity prevailed throughout the year. High clay content inside some of mounds, seems to assist in maintaining high humidity inside the nest (Sen-Sarma, 1988). Steward (1982) have shown that C. brevis is able to accimilatise successfully to either moderately high (90%) or loss (60%) relative humidity at 29.0°C. In India, very little information is available on the effect of abiotic factors on termite activity. Agarwal (1979) has reported that the presence of alates inside the mound increased the mound temperature 30°C in May, which decreased to 26.7-27.8°C soon after swarming of alates in O. microdentatus. Behaviour of the termites in response to relative humidity has been studied. The optimum humidity for Neotermes basei synder has been reported to be 96-98% [Sen-Sarma, 1972], for Heterotermes indicola it was 98-100% [Sen-Sarma, 1969], and for Microtermis beesoni synder it was 100% RH [Sen-Sarma, 1969], and for Microtermis beesoni synder it was 100% RH [Sen-Sarma and Chatterjee, 1966a,b]. Agarwal (1979) has observed that relative humidity inside the mound of O. microdentatus fluctuated within a narrow range of 92-96% throughout the year. Similar is the case in O. obesus. High clay content inside the mounds seemed to assist in maintaining its high humidity (Sen-Sarma, 1974). However, no information is available on the influence of abiotic factors on structural-wood destroying activity of termites. Moreover, little information is available on the qualitative composition of structural-wood destroying termites and types of their www.ijmer.in
177
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
damage arid their wood destroying activity in Indian urban or rural system. Not even a single research report has been published on economic loss caused by termites in different urban and rural areas in India
(Reddy
and
Sammaiah,
1987).
Therefore,
the
present
investigation was undertaken with the objectives of identifying and understanding specific termite damages in different type of structuralwood in different types of houses, and the economic loss caused by them. MATERIAL AND METHODS Survey and Sampling Extensive surveys were conducted periodically during January 2012 to April 2014 which includes regular monthly surveys followed by the keen observation of termite damage to different types of structural wood in RCQ TR Houses and THs in various localities of Gulbarga and Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban systems. A total of 150 houses including Government School Buildings, Libraries, Banks and Government Office Buildings were inspected monthly in the entire urban system, selecting few standard houses of each type in a given locality. The house owners/persons concerned were requested for their co-operation required regarding the termite damage in their houses/offices. The indoor wood-works such as doors, frames, window panels, sashs, joists, rafters and wall supportings, door and window supporting frames of TH s were inspected for damage. Other cellulose material such as books in libraries, wooden almirahs in Government offices and banks including clothes used for wrapping the files in the offices and schools in all the three types of houses were also inspected for the signs of termite activity. The earthen-sheet coverings, runways (shelter tubes) and small chanelled holes on the wood works made by the termites were inspected. Those found with any such type of sign of termite activity and damage were examined rending and exposing the interior portion by a sharp chisel. Presence of small mounds on the www.ijmer.in
178
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
inner and outer walls and on the roof particularly on the top of the wall of these houses were also noted. As the subterranean termites usually enter the houses through the cracks in foundations, floors and wall, spread runways up to the structural wood (Johnson, 1981), such types of cracks either in foundation or floor or walls of houses were also inspected. The termites particularly the soldiers and workers damaging there articles were collected in 80% ethanol for species identification. The intensities of the damage and deterioration were assessed by eye and quantified on the basis of five damage classes (Williams, 1973 and Beal 1979) and recorded. It has hither to been the usual evaluation method for field tests of wood samples. The five damage classes of structural wood, were given numerical symbols as follows. (i) '0' no attack (ii) + a few attack exploratory nibbles (10% damage) (iii) ++Slight attack with the wood remaining serviceable(10% to 25% damage) (iv) +++ moderate attack with wood rendered unserviceable (25% to 50% damage) (v) ++++ Heavy attack with the wood rendered useless for any structural purpose (50 to 75% damage) Results and discussion Of all these termites, C. ceylonicus, O. brunneus, were recorded causing maximum damage and 0. wallonensis, O. redemanni [Wasmann] and M. obesi, causing minor damage to the structural wood of different types of houses in Gulbarga urban system.
www.ijmer.in
179
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
C. ceylonicus and O.assimuthi damage was maximum and C. hemi and 0. Wallonensis was minimum recorded in the Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban System. The percentage of different types of houses damaged by various species of termites in the Gulbarga urban system is presented in Table 3. It shows that 41.68% of the total houses selected at random for sampling, have been damaged by termites, of which maximum were recorded in TR houses (18.18%) and minimum THs (9.6%). C. ceylonicus damaged the structural-wood in maximum number (7.62%) followed by O. brunneus (4.58%) O. wallonensis (1.62%) and 0. redemanni (0.92%) in RCC houses. In case of TR Houses the maximum damage was recorded by O. brunneus (7.62%) followed by C. ceylonicus (6.01%), O. wallonensis (2.73%) and O. redemanni (1.82%). The damage of Thatched houses was recorded maximum by O. brunneus (6.03%) followed by O. wallonensis (1.8%), C. ceylonicus (0.84%) and O. redemanni (0.87%). However the overall damage of termites in different houses recorded as RCC 13.12%, TRH 18.18% and THs 9.6% (Table 3). The total damage caused by C. ceylonicus in different houses recorded 13.63%, O. brunneus 18.23%, O. redemanni 3.61%, O. wallonensis 6.21% in Gulbarga Urban System. Table -3 Percentages of houses damaged by different species of termites in Gulbarga Urban System. Species C. ceylonicus O. brunneus O. redemanni O. Wallonensis Total
www.ijmer.in
RCC 7.62 4.58 0.92 1.62 14.91
TRH 6.01 7.62 1.82 2.73 18.18
TH 0.84 6.03 0.87 1.86 9.6
Total 13.63 18.23 3.61 6.21 41.68
180
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
The percentage of different types of houses damaged by various species of termites in the Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban System is presented in the Table 4. It shows that 50.38% of the total houses selected at random for sampling have been damaged by termites of which maximum were RCC houses(23.60%) and minimum were THs (9.06%). C. ceylonicus damaged the structural wood in maximum number of RCC houses (11.23%) followed by C.heimi which damaged 7.43% of structural wood in RCC Houses. It was recorded that 2.45% of houses were damaged by O. assimithi and 2.32% of RCC were damaged by O.wallonensis in RCC houses. However in TR houses maximum structural wood of houses (7.62%) was damaged by C. ceylonicus and minimum number of houses (2.48%) were damaged by O. assimithi. C.heimi damage was recorded 3.73% whereas damage due to O.wallonensis in TR houses was 3.89%. All the four species of termites in the Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban system damaged the THs. However C. ceylonicus and O. wallonensis were the major culprits which damaged 2.83% and 1.89% THs respectively. O. assimuthi recorded 1.87% whereas O. wallonensis recorded 2.47%. Among all the species of termites of Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban System C. ceylonicus damaged maximum number of houses (21.68%) followed by C. heimi (13.05%) while minimum number of houses were damaged by 0. assimuthi (6.97%). A considerable damaged was recorded by 0. wallonensis in this urban system which amounts 8.68%. The total damage caused by C. ceylonicus in different houses recorded 21.68%, C. heimi recorded 13.05%, O. assimuthi recorded 6.97% and O. wallonensis recorded 8.68% in the Semi urban areas of Gulbarga urban system. www.ijmer.in
181
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Table -4 Percentages of houses damaged by different species of termites in Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban System. Species C. ceylonicus
RCC 11.23
TRH 7.62
TH 2.83
Total 21.68
C.heimi
7.43
3.73
1.89
13.05
0. assimuthi 0. Wallonensis
2.62 2.32
2.48 3.89
1.87 2.47
6.97 8.68
Total
23.60
17.72
9.06
50.38
Different types of structural-wood works damaged by various species of termites in RCC, TR Houses and THs of Gulbarga Urban System were presented in Table 5. It revealed that in RCC, C. ceylonicus damaged door-frames and panels window-sashes, joists, wooden shelves fixed in walls and other wooden-supports of the habitat. O. brunneus damaged all the aforesaid wooden structures except the joist and wooden supports. However, O. redemanni damaged the wooden shelves fixed in walls, door-frames while O. wallonensis damaged the wooden-wall shelves, door-frames and window-sashes. In TR houses G ceylonicus damaged the door-frames and panels, joists, eaves and ceiling. O. brunneus and O. redemanni damaged all the wood-works except the door-frames and panels. O. wallonensis damaged only the joists, rafters, eaves and ceiling, wooden boxes and wall-shelves. In THs, O. brunneus damaged the door-frames, joists, rafters and eaves with C. ceylonicus damaged only joists. O. wallonensis damaged only rafter and O. redemanni damaged the door-frames.
www.ijmer.in
182
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Table 5: List of different indoor wood-works damaged by termites in Gulbarga Urban System Types of Structuralwood
C.
O.brunneu O.redemann O.wallonens
ceylonicus
s
i
is
Door Frame
+
+
+
+
Door Panel
+
+
Window-sash
+
+
Joist
+
-
-
-
Wall Shelves
+
+
+
+
Wooden supports
+
-
-
-
Door Frame
+
_
—
+
Door Panel
+
Window-sash
_
+
+
_
Joist
+
+
+
+
Rafter
-
+
+
+
Ceiling
+
+
+
+
Eaves
+
+
+
+
_
+
RCC House
+
TR House:
Wall Shelves Dry wooden planks laying on
+
the floor
www.ijmer.in
183
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Wooden boxes
-
-
-
+
Door Frame
-
+
+
-
Joist
+
+
_
_
Rafter
-
+
-
+
Eaves
-
+
-
-
Bamboo supports
-
-
-
-
TH
Different types of structural wood works damaged by various species of termites in RCC, TR and THs of Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban System were presented in Table 6. It revealed that in RCC houses both C ceylonicus and C. heimi damaged the door frames and panels, window sashes, joists, wooden supports of shelves. O.assumuthi damaged all the aforesaid wooden structures except the joists and wallshelves. O.wallonensis damaged the window sashes, door frames and other wooden structures of shelves except door panels. In TR houses of Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban System door frames, panels and joists were damaged by C. ceylonicus. However C.heimi damaged all the wood works except joists. O. assumuthi damaged only door frames whereas O. wallonensis damaged all except door panels and window sashes. In THs of Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban System, door frame was damaged by all the species of termites except O. wallonensis. However O. assumithi damaged bamboo supports also besides the door frames.
www.ijmer.in
184
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
A list of different indoor wood works damaged by different species termites in both the urban systems are presented in the Table 7. It reveals that C. ceylonicus damage to structural wood viz., Door Frame, Door Panel, Window frame, Window Shelves, Sill recorded in RCC houses of both the urban systems. C. heimi and O. redemanni damage was recorded to door frame, and wooden shelves respectively. However the damage of O. brunneus and O. assimuthi was not significant. C. ceylonicus damage was recorded to Door Frames, Door Panels, Wooden supports in TR houses in both the urban systems. C. heimi and O. brunneus damage recorded window frames, and door frames respectively in TR houses. The damage of O. redemanni and O. assimuthi was not significant in TRH. C. ceylonicus damaged was also recorded in huts. Table -7: List of different indoor wood works damaged by different species of termites in both the urban systems Species
RCC
C. ceylonicus
Door Frame Door Panel Window frame Window Shelves Sill
TR House
Door Frame Door Panel Wooden supports
Huts
Door frame Rafter Bamboo supports
C. heimi
Door frame
Window frame
-
0. redemanni
Wooden shelf
Books
-
0. brunneus 0. assumuthi
-
Door frame -
www.ijmer.in
Window frame
185
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Table 6:List of different indoor wood-works damaged by termites in Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban System Types of Structuralwood RCC House
C. ceylonicus
C.heimi
O.assumuthi
O.wallonesis
+ + + + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + +
+
Door Frame Door Panel Window-sash Joist Rafter Ceiling Eaves
+ + _ + + +
+ + + _ + +
+ _ _ -
+ _ + + + +
Wall Shelves Dry wooden planks laying on the floor
-
-
-
+
-
-
-
-
+ -
+ + + -
+ +
+ -
Door Frame Door Panel Window-sash Joist Wall Shelves Wooden supports
-
+ + -
TR House:
Wooden boxes TH Door Frame Joist Rafter Eaves Bamboo supports
www.ijmer.in
186
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Reference 1. Ebeling W. 1968 Termites, Identification, biology and control of termites attack buildings. Univ. Calif. Calif. Agric. Exp. Stn. Ext. Serv. Mom. 38, 74 pp. 2. Johnston, H.R., Smith, U.K. and Beal, R.H. 1972. Subterranean termites, their prevention and control in buildings. U.S. Dep. Agric. Home and Garden Bull. No.64,30 p. (Rev. Mar. 1979). 3. Khalil f.m., Rizk, M.M. Maher ALI, A. and Morsy, M.A., 1982. Assessment of damage due to termites in Egypt. II Aswan gournorate upper Egypot. Assiut Journal of Agricultural Science, 13(3): 101-106. 4. Lund,
A.E.,
1967.
The
laboratoiry
and
field
study
of
subterranean termites. Int. Pest. Control., 9(4): 29-33. 5. Reddy, M.V. and Sammaiah, CH., 1987. Damage of Coptotermes ceylonicus Holmgren to structural-wood in telangana region of Andhra Pradesh. In: Chemistry and Biology of Social insects. (Ed. Jorg Eder and Heinz Remboid) Verlag. J. Peperny., Munchen, pp. 672-673. 6. Rizk, M.M., Khalil F.M. and Maher ALI, A., 1982. Assessment of damage due to termite in Egypt. 1. New Valley Governorate Western Deseart. Assiut Journal of Agricultural Science, 13(3): 93-100. 7. Roonwal, M.L., 1979. Termite life and termite control in tropical south Asia. Scientific Publishers, Jodhpur, India PP. 177. 8. Sen-Sarma, P.K. , and Thakur, M.L., 1974. Biology, distribution and economic significance of some termites attacking buildings. J. Indian Plywood Industr. Res. List, 4(3): 115-125.
www.ijmer.in
187
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
9. Sen-Sarma,
P.K.
and
Chatterjee,
P.N.,
1966a.
Humidity
Behaviour of termites. I. Effect of relative humidity on the longevity of workers of Microtermes beesoni Snyder under starvation condition. Indian Forest Bull. (N.S.) Ent. No.255,1-6. 10. Sen-Sarma, P.K. and Chatterjee, P.N., 1966b. The effect of preconditioning on the humidity reactions of workers of Mocrocerotermes beesoni Snyder. Insectes Sociaux, 13: 267-275. 11. Sen-Sarma, P.K., 1969. Effect of relative humidity on the lonevity of starving workers and soldiers of Heterotermes indicola (Wasm) (Insecta: Isoptera), Proc. 7th Congr. Int. Un. Study Soc. Social Insects (Bern, 1969), Bern. pp. 263-266. 12. Sen-Sarma, P.M. 1972. Laboratory testing of natural termite resistance of Indian woods. In: Termite Problems in India. (Ed. by MX. Roonwal] New Delhi (Counc. Sci. & Ind. Res.) PP.8-14. 13. Waller, D.A. and Lafage, J.P., 1987. Seasonal patterns in Foraging Groups of Coptotermes formosanus (Rhino termitidae). Sociobiology. 14. Williams, R.M.C., 1976. Factors limiting the distribution of building damaging dry-wood termites (Isoptera, Cryptotermes) species Mater, und Org., 3: [Suppl.] 394-406.
www.ijmer.in
188
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
STATUS OF WOMEN AND ROLE OF ORGANIZATIONS IN WOMEN EMPOWERMENT IN INDIA Dr. Jaibheem Dhargi Guest Lecturer Department of Women’s Studies Gulbarga University, Kalaburagi Present Position of Women in India As on 1st March, 2011 India’s population stood at 1.21 billion comprising of 623.72 million (51.54%) males and 586.47 million (48.46%) females. India, which accounts for world’s 17.5 percent population, is the second most heavily populated country in the world next only to China (19.4%). Of the 121 crore Indians, 83.3 crore (68.84%) live in rural areas while 37.7 crore (31.16%) live in urban areas, as per the Census of India’s 2011. Male
Female
Literacy (%)
82.1
65.46
Sex ratio (child)
1000
914
Sex ratio adults
1000
940
Work population ratio
819
336
MP in loksab (%)
89.18
10.82
Though the child-sex ratio [0 to 6 years] have declined from 927 female per 1000 males in 1991-2001 to 914 females per 1000 males, increasing trend in the child sex ratio was seen in Punjab, Haryana, Himachal Pradesh, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu, Mizoram and Andaman and Nicobar Island. Literacy rate increased from 64.83% in 2001 to 74.04% in 2011; 82.14% male literacy, 65.46% female literacy.
www.ijmer.in
189
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
However, other parameter that reflect the status and position of women in society such as work participation rates, sex ratio in the age group of 0-6 years and gender based violence continue to be heavily skewed against women. Associated Organizations for women The Department of Women and Child Development is set up in the year 1985 as a part of the Ministry of Human Resource Development to give the much needed impetus to the holistic development of women and children. With effect from 30.01.2006, the Department has been upgraded to a Ministry.
The Ministry has 7 autonomous organisations viz.
National Commission for Women (NCW)
National Commission for Protection of Child Rights (NCPCR)
Rashtriya Mahila Khosh (RMK)
Central Social Welfare Board (CSWB)
Central Adoption Resource Authority (CARA)
National Institute of Development (NIPCCD)
National Mission for Empowerment of Women (NMEW)
Public
Co-operation
and
Child
National Commission for Protection of Child Rights (NCPCR) The National Commission for Protection of Child Rights (NCPCR) was set up in March 2007 under the Commission for Protection of Child Rights Act, 2005, an Act of Parliament (December 2005). The commission Mandate is to ensure that all Laws, Policies, Programmes, and Administrative Mechanisms are in consonance with the Child Rights perspective as enshrined in the Constitution of India and also the UN Convention on the Rights of the Child. The Child is defined as a person in the 0 to 18 years age group.
www.ijmer.in
190
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Rashtriya Mahila Khosh (RMK) Since the 1950s, various governments in India have experiment with a large number of grant and subsidy based poverty alleviation programmes. Studies prove that these mandatory and dedicated subsidised financial programmes, implemented through banking institutions, have not been fully successful in meeting their social and economic objectives: Central Social Welfare Board (CSWB) The Central Social Welfare Board come into being in an era when welfare services for the disadvantaged sections of society were not systematised and the welfare infrastructure was not yet a formal construct. In response to the surveys and information collected, multiplicities of programmes were designed. Most of these address simple needs such as, balwadis for the children of women workers, Hostels for Working Women and aid to various organizations that are working for the aged, handicapped and other such groups. Welfare Extension Projects and Border Area Projects were started in areas where there were no organizations to implement the programmes of the Board. The Board gave assistance for family welfare, aid to ‘cases of undeserved want’ – old age, sickness, disablement and unemployment. It also organized emergency relief in natural disasters. Apart from this, the Board organized programmes of training in social work and carried out pilot projects. Central Adoption Resource Authority (CARA) Central Adoption Resource Authority (CARA) is an independent body under the Ministry of Women & Child Development, Government of India. It functions as the nodal body for adoption of Indian children and is mandated to monitor and regulate in-country and inter-country adoptions. CARA is designated as the Central Authority to deal through inter- country adoptions in accordance with the provisions of the Hague www.ijmer.in
191
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Convention on Inter-country Adoption, 1993, ratified by Government of India in 2003. CARA mostly deals with adoption of orphan, abandoned and surrendered children through its associated /recognised adoption agencies. National
Institute
of
Public
Co-operation
and
Child
Development (NIPCCD) NIPCCD, is a premier organisation devoted to promotion of voluntary action research, training and documentation in the overall domain of women and child development. Established within New Delhi in the year 1966 under Societies Registration Act of 1860, it functions under the aegis of the Ministry of Women and Child Development. In order to provide to the region-specific requirements of the country, the Institute, over a period of time, has established four Regional Centers at Guwahati (1978), Bangalore (1980), Lucknow (1982) and Indore (2001). The Institute functions since an apex institution for training functionaries of the Integrated Child Development Services (ICDS) programme. As a nodal resource agency, it has also been entrusted with the responsibility of training and capacity building of functionaries at the national and regional level, under the new scheme of Integrated Child Protection Scheme (ICPS). It has also been designated, by the Ministry of Women and Child Development, the nodal institution for imparting training on two important issues of Child Rights and Prevention of trafficking of women & children for SAARC countries. Institute's expertise and performance was recognized by UNICEF in 1985 when it awarded the Maurice Pate Award for its outstanding contribution in the field of Child Development. National Mission for Empowerment of Women (NMEW) The National Mission for Empowerment of Women (NMEW) was launch by the Government of India on International Women’s Day www.ijmer.in
192
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
in 2010 with the aim to strengthen overall processes that promote allround development of women It has the mandate to strengthen the inter-sector convergence; facilitate the process of coordinating all the women’s welfare and socio-economic development programmes across ministries and departments. The Mission aims to make available a single window service for all programmes run by the Government for Women under aegis of various Central Ministries. In light among its mandate, the Mission has been named Mission Poorna Shakti, implying a vision for holistic empowerment of women. NMEW will achieve gender equality, and gender justice and holistic progress of women through inter-sectoral convergence of programmes relating to women, forging synergy between various stakeholders and creating an enabling environment conducive to social change. Other Activities and Association for Women Empowerment The Self-Employed Women’s Association (SEWA) movement in Ahmedabad led by Ela Bhatt, which was a sort of pioneering women’s trade union movement that began in 1972, was another such landmark in the history of the contemporary women’s movement. Women involved in various trades in the comfortable sector were brought together by their shared experiences such as low earnings, harassment at home, harassment by contractors and the police, poor work conditions, non-recognition of their labour to list just a few. Apart from collective bargaining, the movement strove to improve working conditions through training. Family Planning Programme In 1952, the Indian Government was one of the first in the world to launch a national family planning programme, which was later expanded to encompass maternal and child health, family welfare and nutrition the figures given in the publication are based on the data reported by the States/ Uts at district level and then consolidated at www.ijmer.in
193
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
State and National level on HMIS portal. Percentage of districts reported in 2009-10 and 2010-11 was 98%. Janani Suraksha Yojana: The Jannani Suraksha Yojana (JSY) is a 100% centrally sponsored scheme and it integrates cash assistance with delivery and post delivery care. The scheme was launched with focus on demand promotion for institutional deliveries in States and regions where these are low. It targeted lowering of MMR by ensuring that deliveries were conducted by Skilled Birth Attendants at every birth. The Yojana has identified the Accredited Social Health Activist (ASHA), as an effective link between the Government and the poor pregnant women in 18 low performing States, namely the 8 EAG States and Assam and J&K and the remaining NE States. In other States and UTs, wherever, AWW and TBAs or ASHA like activist has been engaged for this purpose, they can be associated with this Yojana for providing the services. The JSY scheme has shown phenomenal growth in the last three years. Starting with a modest number of 7.39 Lakhs beneficiaries in 2006-07, the total number reached 113.89 lakh during 2010-11. The last few decades or after Independence of India have no doubt seen women have been coming out in the open and joining the mainstream of development of the country. Ever, it is to be seen whether this has helped them in achieving a status for themselves, in the minds of people at large. After sixty years of Independence of India, we have seen women coming out to be educated, to do jobs, to make careers, yet the perception that women are second to men has not been erased. So now, after six decades of trying to rival men it is time for us women to take stock of the situation and make a more strict effort to fight for our rights and equality with men and men with a changed attitude, and not only a change of assignment or appearance. www.ijmer.in
194
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
DIVERSITY OF TERMITE FAUNA IN URBAN SYSTEMS
Syeda Qaseem Fatima
M.Rajashekhar
Department of Zoology Gulbarga University Kalaburgi, Karnataka
Department of Zoology Gulbarga University Kalaburgi, Karnataka
K.Vijaykumar Department of Zoology Gulbarga University Kalaburgi, Karnataka
Introduction The great architect, Frank Lloyd Wright, once said "we may use wood with intelligence only if we understand it" (Haverty 1976). As a part of understanding wood one has to understand the role that insects play in its biodeterioration. It is possible to use wood in home construction and have it last for reasonable period of time without deterioration by insects provided proper care is taken, although longterm service of wood will vary according to the intensity and type of insect attack to which the structures may be naturally exposed. Termites are of principal importance as pests of wooden buildings or the wooden parts of the buildings. Although destruction by these creatures is relatively slow, insidious, and spotty, the total of the damage they cause places termites among the most important groups of insects (Abe and others 2000). Termites commonly known as white-ants, are medium sized, soft bodied insects with dull white to light or dark brown in colour. Thus, they are called "kashtra harika" (wood-feeding) in ancient Sanskrit literature. They live in colonies in nests (termitorium). They are present throughout the tropics other than the high-altitude zones. They also occur at a lesser degree in some temperate regions.
www.ijmer.in
195
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Zimmerman et al., (1982) reported 70% of land being occupied by the termites in tropical and warm temperate areas of the world. Economically, they are not only the serious pests of agriculture and plantations but also they cause enormous damage to structuralwood in different types of houses in all tropical and sub-tropical countries. (Bignell and Eggleton, 1998 and 2000). The structural-wood both in urban and rural areas, is severely damaged by termites (Reddy 1982, Edwards and Mill 1986). It has been reported that subterranean termites, mainly Coptotermes species and Odontotermes species account for 95% of the termite-damage of wood and wood-products (Roonwall 1979, Edwards and Mill 1986). In the present paper, an attempt has been made to servey the diversity of different type of termites which damage the urban wood in Kalaburagi City. Materials and methods Survey and Sampling Extensive surveys were conducted periodically during January 2012 to April 2014 which includes regular monthly surveys followed by the keen observation of termite damage to different types of structural wood in RCQ TR Houses and THs in various localities of Gulbarga and Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban systems. A total of 150 houses including Government School Buildings, Libraries, Banks and Government Office Buildings were inspected monthly in the entire urban system, selecting few standard houses of each type in a given locality. The house owners/persons concerned were requested for their co-operation required regarding the termite damage in their houses/offices. The indoor wood-works such as doors, frames, window panels, sashs, joists, rafters and wall supporting, door and window supporting frames of TH s were inspected for damage. Other cellulose
www.ijmer.in
196
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
material such as books in libraries, wooden almirahs in Government offices and banks including clothes used for wrapping the files in the offices and schools in all the three types of houses were also inspected for the signs of termite activity. The earthen-sheet coverings, runways (shelter tubes) and small channeled holes on the wood works made by the termites were inspected. Those found with any such type of sign of termite activity and damage were examined rending and exposing the interior portion by a sharp chisel. Presence of small mounds on the inner and outer walls and on the roof particularly on the top of the wall of these houses was also noted. Results and discussion Various species of termites recorded within the limits of Gulbarga and Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban systems are presented in Table 1 and Table 2. They belonged to two families namely Rhinotermitidae and Termitidae. In, the family Rhintoermitidae, Coptotermes ceylonicus [Holmgren] was recorded while in Termitidae, Odontotermes brunneus [Hagen], Odontotermes redemanni [Wasmann], Odontotermes wallonensis [Wasmann] and Microtermes obesi [Holmgren] were recorded in Gulbarga Urban system. In Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban system, Coptotermes ceylonicus [Holmgren] and C.heimi [Wasmann] of family Rhinotermitidae along with Odontotermes assimuthi [Holmgren] and Odontotermes wallonensis [Wasmann] of family termitidae were recorded. The systematic position of termite pests causing damage to wooden works in both urban systems. 1.
Phylum
-
rthropoda
Class
_
Insecta
www.ijmer.in
197
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Order
_
Isoptera
Family Sub family
-
Rhinotermitidae Coptoterminitae
Genus
-
Coptotermes
Species
-
C. ceylonicus C.heimi
2.
Phylum Class Order Family Sub family Genus Species
_ _ -
Arthropoda Insecta Isoptera Termitidae Macrotermitinae Odontotermes O. brunneus O. redemanni O. assimuthi
3.
Phylum Class Order Family Sub family Genus Species
www.ijmer.in
-
Arthropoda
_ _ -
Insecta Isoptera Termitidae Microtermitinae Microtermes M. obesi
198
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Table -1 Diversity of species of termites causing damage to structural wood works in Gulbarga Urban System. Family
Sub Family
Species
RHINOTERMITID Coptotermitinae AE TERMITIDAE
** Coptotermes ceylonicus (Holmgren)
Macrotermitinae
** Odontotermes brunneus (Hagen) *Odontotermes redemanni(Naswann) * Odontotermes wallonensis[Wasmann] * Microtermes obesi Holmgren
(** Severe Damage, * Minor damage) Table - 2 Diversity of species of termites causing damage to structural wood works in Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban System. Family
Sub Family
Species
RHINOTERMITIDAE
Coptotermitinae
** Coptotermes ceylonicus Holmgren * Coptotermes heimi
TERMITIDAE
Macrotermitinae
** Odontotermes assimuthi * Odontotermes wallonensis [Wasmann]
(** Severe Damage, * Minor damage)
Of all these termites, C. ceylonicus, O. brunneus, were recorded causing maximum
www.ijmer.in
damage and 0. wallonensis,
O. redemanni
199
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
[Wasmann] and M. obesi, causing minor damage to the structural wood of different types of houses in Gulbarga urban system. C. ceylonicus and O.assimuthi damage was maximum and C. hemi and 0. Wallonensis was minimum recorded in the Semi urban areas of Gulbarga Urban System. References : 1. Abe, T., Bignell, d.e. and Higshi M., (eds) 2000 Termites, Evolution, Sociality, Symbioses, Ecology, Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht 2. Zimmerman, P.R.., 1982, Termites: A potentially large source of atmospheric methane, carbon dioxide and molecular hydrogen. Science. 218:563-565. 3. Bignell, D.E., and Eggleton P., 1998. Termites., Encyclopedia of Ecology and Environmental Management. Blackwell Science, Oxford PP 744-746. 4. Bignell, DE., and Eggleton P., 2000. Termites in ecosystems Kulwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht. PP 367-387. 5. Roonwal, M.L., 1979. Termite life and termite control in tropical south Asia. Scientific Publishers, Jodhpur, India PP. 177. 6. Edwards, R. and Mill, A.E., 1986. Termites in buildings their biology and Control. Rentokil Limited, Great Britain. 7. Haverty, M.I., 1976. Termites pest control. 44(5): 12-17,46-49.
www.ijmer.in
200
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
DUAL-REDUNDANCY ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM WITH PASSAGE ORGANIZATION TECHNIQUE IN AIRCRAFT Ganesh Mohanrao Dhonde ME(CAD/CAM) Department of Mechanical Engineering Aditya College of Engineering Beed, Maharashtra, India I. INTRODUCTION This paper will highlight the technology of its braking system in the consideration of developing the landing safety. At present, in the fourth generation of battle-plane devised by US, redundant technology is widely used, not only in the flight control system but also in the anti-skid braking system initially [4~5]. However the technology is not available to the public. While in China, the reliability of anti-skid braking system is less studied and the redundant technology has not been widely applied in the anti-skid braking system [6]. Though the dual-redundant braking system is used in a certain newly-devised plane in China, the redundancy is only applied in the signal circuit loop, but not in the hydraulic system. Therefore, strictly speaking, it is only a semi hot standby redundancy being used in the anti-skid braking system [7~9].This paper introduces a dual-redundant anti-skid braking system with crossing management method that ensures the system a normal situation when several faults occur in the different positions of the two loops. With this system, the reliability, the fault management and the ability of safeguard in the process of braking are greatly improved. The crossing dual-redundancy means that each loop controller can crossing-control the braking accessories of the other loop in a dualredundant system, which may lead to a higher ability of fault removing and a more flexible way of reconstruction. In this way, the reliability of www.ijmer.in
201
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
the anti-skid braking system is effectively improved and thus provides a useful method and idea for the development of aviation technology and civilian industry. II.The Deficiency of Anti-Skid Braking Control System with Non-Redundancy At present, the technology of non-redundancy is widely employed in the braking system of aircraft in China, which ensures safety only when one fault occurs in the braking system. When the aircraft is braking for landing in the normal situation, the anti-skid braking controller receives command signals given by the aviator and the fed back speed signals passed by the speed sensors, then brakes the wheels, which turn out to be a closed-loop system [10~11]. The braking controller’s function is to slow down the airplane by breaking the wheels without making the wheels skid. When the selfchecking errors occur in the controller, the system needs to be switched to the emergency braking system which uses different hydraulic system and servo salves compared with the normal anti-skid braking system. Nevertheless, by lack of speed closed loop, the effect of the emergency braking system is not satisfying. The figure 1 shows the configuration of the braking system.
www.ijmer.in
202
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
III.DESIGN OF THE ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM WITH REDUNDANCY In order to improve the capability of the fault-tolerance in the braking system, this paper designed a novel anti-skid braking system with redundancy which can keep working when several faults occur. A. Definition of Redundancy Redundant technology is a kind of fault-tolerance technique, which can shield and remove the fault automatically and even recover from the fault. The technology of redundancy is an important measure to improve the reliability of mission and safety in the system. It can be divided into three categories: hardware redundancy, software redundancy and time redundancy [12]. There is no linear relationship between the amount of redundancy and the reliability of the system. That is to say, by increasing the amount of redundancy, on one hand, the capability of fault-tolerance can be improved, on the other hand, the circuits of detection, arbitration and seclusion can be correspondingly increased, which will lead to the increase of the point of fault and the difficulty of the redundant management [13]. Therefore, a proper point of balance between the amount and the reliability of the redundancy should be decided. B. Cross-redundant design in the braking system Considering the weight and capacity of the braking controller in which too many redundancies are not permitted, and meanwhile, the dual-redundancy with crossing management can be fully meet the demand of reliability of anti-skid braking system. Therefore, the crossredundant design in the braking system will be explored in this paper. the crossing dual-redundant design used in the braking system. In the normal condition, both controller A and controller B can do selfwww.ijmer.in
203
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
detecting, get the values from command sensor and speed sensor to fulfill the anti-skid braking; but only the output of controller A can be given to the servo-valves to brake the airplane, the output of controller B is cut off by the arbitration part. When the arbitration part find faults in the controller A, it will enable the output of controller standby redundant controllers controller B are communicated
cut off the output of controller A, and B to brake the airplane. So the hot are realized. The controller A and with each other In order to further
improve the reliability of the control system, the dual-redundant electronic parts are used in the command sensor and speed sensor---one sensor has two outputs (secondary side coils) connecting controller A and controller B separately; two hydraulic systems are used in the braking valve system, the two valves connected with the controller A are driven by the hydraulic system I, and the other two valves connected with the controller B are driven by the hydraulic system II--the crossing-redundancy is hence built. By this means, the system presents a more flexible reconstruction when faults occur. In order to introduce the system easily, the channel that contains controller A and braking accessories which connected with controller A is called channel A, so does channel B.
C. The management of cross-redundancy in braking system The purpose of management of the cross-redundancy is to
www.ijmer.in
204
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
reconstruct the system when faults occur. The reconstruction of system refers to the process of removing fault elements and rebuilding the system when the system finds faults. The capability of reconstruction reflects of the fault-tolerant ability in the system. The system studied in this paper uses the design of crossing dual-redundancy for the purpose of increasing the flexibility during reconstruction and improving the fault-tolerant ability of the system, which is showed in figure 3:
Faults usually occur in the command sensors, speed sensors, servovalves and the controller of the braking control system. This paper designs and discusses only the fault in the position of electric dualredundancy. Each command sensor and speed sensor has one original side coil and two secondary side coils. Table 1 partly shows the channels of reconstruction in the system when faults occur, “1” stands for being at work, “0” stands for being out of work, the signs of the channels are showed in the figure 3.
www.ijmer.in
205
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
In the table 1, the first line shows the condition when there is no fault; from the second line to the sixth line some reconstructed conditions are presented when there is one (one point) fault; the seventh line shows one of the reconstructed conditions when there are several faults in the different point of the two cross-channels and the controllers are at work; from the eighth line to the tenth line are some conditions that the system cannot reconstruct. Supposing the controller A and the controller B are both working well. When one or two faults occur in channel A , leading to the failure that the data are unable to be passed to controller A from channel A, and meanwhile, channel B are working without fault at this time, controller A can obtain the data from those fault points in channel A through communicating with controller B. This process will not affect the real-time performance and the veracity of system with the prompt and accurate communication between controller A and controller B. The system cannot be reconstructed and must switch to the emergency braking system when some faults occur as follows: (1) the two controllers are both out of work; (2) only one controller is at work, but there is fault in its channel; (3) two controllers are both at work, but there are faults in the same point of the two channels.
www.ijmer.in
206
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
IV.THE TEST RESULT The anti-skid braking control system is tested in the Inertia Dynamometer repeatedly, and passed the test of load successfully. Figure 4 is the result of the 1/4 load inertial platform test. In the process of braking, channel A is injected faults online separately in the command sensor, the speed sensor and the servo valve at the 10th second, the 20th second and the 30th second. Fig. 4 above shows the result that the servo-valve current and the braking pressure present no change at all before and after the injection of fault. Therefore, the system can remove the fault and work safely and stably when the fault is injected online. It is proved to be correct in the design of hardware and software and the mode of redundant management as well.
Fig. 4 The graph of result of 1/4 load of inertial platform test V.THE RELIABILITY ANALYSIS ON CROSS-REDUNDANT ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM The reliability and failure rate can be calculated by the reliability theory. The high reliability of the crossing dual-redundant system can be proved by comparing with the non-redundant system and common hot standby dual-redundant system.
www.ijmer.in
207
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
In the common hot standby dual-redundant system, the system can work normally when one of the two systems can work normally. The system can be regarded as parallel connection by two non-redundant systems. Its failure rate is
To calculate the reliability of the crossing dual-redundant system is rather complex. The system can be regarded as a common hot standby dual-redundant system when there are faults in the controllers; the system can be regarded as parallel series system when no fault occurs in the controllers. Based on the definition and theory of reliability, the failure rate is and the reliability is
and the reliability is
Base on the result of the calculation, so the crossing dual redundant system has lower failure rate and higher reliability the design of the crossing dual redundancy can greatly improve the reliability and safety of the system.
www.ijmer.in
208
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
VI.CONCLUSION In order to ameliorate the deficiency of the anti-skid braking control system, the crossing dual-redundant system which involves the crossing dual-redundancy with proper management is studied in this paper. The data of the ground inertial platform test and the result calculated by the theory of reliability show that the reliability and safety of anti-skid braking control system are greatly improved, and the level of the anti-skid braking control of the aircraft is improved to a certain extent as well. Therefore, it is of great value to be spread and applied. References 1. T. Matt. The new world of custom wheel & brake service[J]. Aviation Maintenance 2003, 22 (8): 18~21 2. Croane co. Hydro-aire inc. Antiskid system solutions for regional aircraft [M]. 2000.7: 1~6 3. G. Wang, W. Xie, and Y. Chen. The redundant structures for a new style of fly control computer [J]. Aeronautical Computer Technique, 2005.9, 35 (3): 106~109 4. Y. Papadopoulos and C. Grante. Techniques and tools for automated safety analysis & decision support for redundancy allocation in automotive systems [J]. 27th Annual International Computer Software and Applications Conference, Proceedings. 2003: 105~110 5. W. Lu and L. Xie. The review and prospect of aircraft antiskid braking system [J]. Aeronautical Science and Technology, 2003.2: 29~32 6. H. Duan, H. Gong, and Y. Yang. Research on redundant technique of FBL control system [J]. Aircraft Design, 2002.9 (3): 36~39 7. R. N. Kiele. The problem of interpretation of tire skid test results-the interaction of variations in speed, water, depth, and surface with tire coefficients [J]. SAE Preprints730281, 1989: 13~14
8. M. Naoshi, K. Tetsuji, K. Kazuyuki. Analytical model of μ-S curve using generalized skewed-parabola [J]. JSAE Review, 2003, 24: 87~92
www.ijmer.in
209
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
A STUDY ON EXECUTIVE TRAINING WITH REFERENCE TO AIRPORT AUTHORITY OF INDIA (AAI) AND ELECTRONIC CORPORATION OF INDIA (ECIL) Dr.Nagaraju Battu
Ch.Yadagiri
Assistant Professor Department of Human Resource Management Acharya Nagarjuna University Guntur
Research Scholar Department of Human Resource Management Acharya Nagarjuna University Guntur
INTRODUCTION Employee training tries to improve skills or add to the existing level of knowledge so that employee is better equipped to do his present job, or to prepare him for a higher position with increased responsibilities. However individual growth is not and ends in itself. Organizational growth need to be measured along with individual growth. Training refers to the teaching or learning activities done for the primary purpose of helping members of an organization to acquire and apply the knowledge skills, abilities and attitude needed by that organization to acquire and apply the same. Broadly speaking training is that act of increasing the knowledge and skill of an employee for doing a particular job. In today's scenario change is the order of the day and the only way to deal with it is to learn and grow. Employees have become central to success or failure of an organization they are the cornucopia of ideas. So it high time the organization realizes that train and retrains is the mantra of new millennium. AIPORTS AUTHORITY OF INDIA Airports Authority of India (AAI) was constituted by an Act of Parliament and came into being on 1st April 1995 by merging erstwhile www.ijmer.in
210
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
National Airports Authority and International Airports Authority of India. The merger brought into existence a single Organization entrusted with the responsibility of creating, upgrading, maintaining and managing civil aviation infrastructure both on the ground and air space in the country. AAI manages 125 airports, which include 11 International Airport, 08 Customs Airports, 81 Domestic Airports and 27 Civil Enclaves at Defense airfields. AAI provides air navigation services over 2.8 million square nautical miles of air space. AAI's endeavor, in enhanced focus on 'customer's expectations', has evinced enthusiastic response to independent agency, which has organized customer satisfaction surveys at 30 busy Airports. These surveys have enabled us to undertake improvements on aspects recommended by the Airport users. The receptacles for our 'Business Reply Letters' at Airports have gained popularity; these responses enable us to understand the changing aspirations of Airport users. During the first year of the millennium, AAI endeavors to make its operations more transparent and also make available the instantaneous information to customers by deploying state-of-art Information Technology. ELECTRONIC CORPORATION OF INDIA ECIL was set up under the Department of Atomic Energy on 11th April, 1967 with a view to generate a strong indigenous capability in the field of professional grade electronics. The initial accent was on total self-reliance and ECIL was engaged in the Design, Development, Manufacture and Marketing of several products with emphasis on three technology lines viz. computers, Controls Systems and Communications. Over the year, ECIL pioneered the development of various complex electronics products without any external technology help and scored several ‘firsts’ in these field, prominent among them being country’s.
www.ijmer.in
211
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Executive Training As an organization increases in size and complexity, its management must adopt by becoming more specialized. (John M.Ivancevich., James H.Donnelly, Jr.and James L.Gibson,1996) The history of most ongoing organizations reveals an evolution through which the management has grown from one manager with many subordinates to a team of many managers with many subordinates. The development of different types of managers has occurred as a result of evolution of management over the years. One way to grasp the complexity of management is to see that managers can practice at different levels in an organization and with a different range of organizational activities. Looking at the level and scope of various kinds of managers it is evident that how different skills and roles are emphasized in different management. Based on this, management is divided into Executives, middle managers and top managers. The Executives are the lowest level in an Organisation at which the individual are responsible for the work of others. They are also called Front line or First line management. Training Programmes and coverage The extent of manpower trained including the Executives in the select organizations has been discussed in previous Chapters. An indepth analysis of the training programmes conducted for Executives during 2008-09 to 2012-13 is attempted now with the data given Table 6.1. It is observed that the number of programmes conducted increased by 68 percent from 2008-09 to 2012-13 while the Executives trained increased by 51 percent, which indicates that there was no proportionate increase in the number of employees trained. In the succeeding two years the number of programmes organized was much erratic and the trainees covered decreased by 36 percent. Further it is to be noted that the number of programmes conducted and the
www.ijmer.in
212
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Executives trained increased by 20 percent and 31 percent respectively from 2010-11 to 2012-13. Evidently the number of managers trained though increased was not commensurate with the increase in the number of programmes. It can be inferred that the management did not lay stress on the number of participants covered in each of the training programmes. It was only in the earlier years that increase in the number of Executives trained was encouraging. The training programmes of Executives received a setback, especially during 2010-11 to 2012-13. This might be due to indirect effect of general recession. Review of Literature The implementation of extensive continuing training and development programmes, not only for the improvement of technical competence, but fir the development of cultural behavior and values congruent with that of the company’s core values and philosophy, is one of their emerging best practices that stimulate innovation. (Divina M. Edralin, 2011). The success and survival of any organization depends on how well it can maintain and gain market share in a particular industry. In order to achieve this goal, organizations constantly need well prepared employees. Only those employees with the right and updated knowledge, skills and behaviors can make a real difference for the companies where they work. Thus, appropriate employee training becomes a critical component in any organization’s strategy (JulioSeptiembre 2012). Human resource management practices that we hypothesize will raise the return to and, hence, complement long-term-employment (LTE) contracts. Compared to firms that do not offer LTE contracts, we find that firms offering LET contracts make greater use of a wide array of the hypothesized complementary practices relating to training, compensation, information-sharing, job design, employee customer www.ijmer.in
213
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
interactions, and responses to declines in the demand for labor. Additionally, we provide evidence of complementarities between LTE contracts and above average use of the hypothesized complementary practices in their effects on quit rates, an inverse proxy for employees’ reciprocal commitment to LTE (Cynthia L. Gramm & John F. Schnell 2013). This article discusses the way in which employers provide training and how it has an impact on individual, organizational, and industry skill development, it uses findings from a research study uncovered three training and development models that had likely consequences for employee turnover. These models were labeled Individual Development. Team Development and Organisational Development. Individual Development contributed to higher employee turnover when it was adopted in a work environment which lacked employment-growth opportunities, and where employees perceived more external job alternatives. Team Development was likely to contribute to lower employee turnover if adopted in conjunction with other high-performance work practices, or if there was evidence of job embeddedness in the organization. Finally, the Organisational Development model appeared to contribute to higher employee turnover when the training activities contributed to a lack of role clarity, and to poorer employee commitment to the organization (Geraldine Kennett, 2013). For micro-entrepreneurs with lower skills or pooer initial financial practices, the impact of the rule-of-thumb training was significantly larger than that of the standard accounting training, suggesting that simplifying training programs might improve their effectiveness for less sophisticated individuals (Alejandro Drexler, Greg Fischer, and AntoinetterSchoar 2014).
www.ijmer.in
214
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
The purpose of this mixed methods sequential explanatory study was to explore how specific dimensions of supervisor support (mentoring, coaching, social support, and task support) influence the transfer of learned knowledge and skills to the job. Quantitative data were collected from employees (N = 48) who develop curriculum at an educational organization and analyzed using multiple regression analysis; this was followed by in-depth interviews (n = 10) that focused on participants’ lived experiences of supervisor support, transfer motivation, and training transfer. Findings suggest that mentoring, coaching, social support, and task support directly and/or indirectly facilitate training transfer and provide greater insight into the underlying mechanisms that account for how and why supervisor support influences training transfer.(Laura A. SchindlerGary J. Burkholder 2015) Need of the study Many studies have been carried out encompassing various issues and dimensions of human resources training and development. However, most of the studies have been carried out with a focus on top and middle level executives and managers. There is hardly any specific study with regard to officers even though they constitute a very important segment of the management. It appears that neither the importance of this category of managers has been realized nor sustained endeavour has been made by the enterprises for their quality improvement. The job satisfaction level of these front level managers is observed to be extremely disheartening and they lack the required dynamism to effectively perform their roles. As against this backdrop, it is considered imperative to carryout the study on human resource training with special reference to Executives in both the public sector organizations namely Airports Authority of India (AAI), Mumbai and Electronics Corporation of India
www.ijmer.in
215
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Ltd (ECIL), Hyderabad. Though these organizations have been working for more than 2 to 5 decades and employs a large number of officers, no research study has been carried out so far exclusively on training of this category of Executives. This study aims to find out the methods used for enhancing the capabilities of executives in order to increase their productivity and management skills that would help the overall performance of organization. Objectives of the Study 1. To study the executive training in the AAI and ECIL 2. To Discuss about the training programmes and coverage for executives in the AAI and ECIL 3. To examine the need of training for the executives in AAI and ECIL 3. To offer suggestions relating to improve training programs for executives in AAI and ECIL Methodology of the study In ECIL, Hyderabad there are 23 divisions, out of which 6 divisions are chosen namely Software System and Solution Division (SSSD), Component Division (CD), IT Services Division (ITSD), Instruments and system division (ISD), Control and Automation Division (CAD) and Control Instrumentation Division (CID). In ECIL there are about 5000 employees are working in different departments, out of which 3000 belongs to Officer Cadre. In the chosen divisions approx 542 Executive cadre employees such as, Technical Managers, Senior Technical Managers, Deputy General Managers, Senior Deputy Managers, Additional General Managers and General Managers are working and out of which 200 Executives were chosen for the study. The sample is chosen using stratified random sampling. Thus, in all the study covered a sampling of 350 Executives of which 150 are from Airport Authority of India, Mumbai and 200 are from Electronic Corporation of India Ltd., Hyderabad. In selecting the www.ijmer.in
216
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
sample respondents, care has been taken to include only those Executives who completed a minimum service of 2 years in the particular cadre. The sample included both Executives who have been promoted or directly recruited to this particular cadre. TOOLS OF DATA COLLECTION A structured questionnaire has been used as an important tool to collect the primary data from the sample respondents of the select organizations namely Airport Authority of India (AAI), Mumbai and Electronics Corporation of India Ltd (ECIL), Hyderabad. The questionnaire covered 10 broad areas of training which includes identification of training needs, selection of training, methods of training, in-company training, training frequency, resource persons and infrastructure for training, skill development on training, budget and evaluation of training programmes. Data Analysis The primary data was collected and analyses by using statistical package for social science (SPSS) version 17.0 of the computer packages. Hypothesis of the study To further validate the difference in mean scores on the Respondents opinion on need for training as perceived by trained employees of respective select organizations. The following Hypothesis is formulated. H0: There is no significant difference in the mean scores Respondents opinion on need for training as practiced at AAI and ECIL. H1: There is significant difference in the mean scores on Respondents opinion on need for training as practiced at AAI and ECIL
www.ijmer.in
217
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
TABLE 1 EXECUTIVES OPINION FOR TRAINING Particulars
Weighted Average AAI
ECIL
TOTAL
To update Job related knowledge
2.5
2.3
2.4
To acquire newer skills to perform the job more effectively
3.0
3.8
3.4
To adjust and adapt oneself to change in work environment
3.9
3.9
3.9
To reach higher levels of productivity
3.4
3.6
3.5
To get better understanding of dynamics of human relations
2.4
2.0
2.2
The weighted average calculated on the basis of the opinions expressed by the respondents about the need for training are given in Table-6.6. To adjust and adapt oneself to change in work environment was assigned highest mean value (3.9). Factors like 'to reach higher levels of productivity' and 'acquire newer skills to perform the job more effectively' were ranked second followed by 'to update job related knowledge (2.4), and to get better understanding of dynamics of human relations (2.2). Organization wise analysis also indicated that "To adjust and adapt oneself to change in work environment was considered as the prime factor necessitating training by majority of the respondents in AAI and ECIL. The need for 'achieving higher levels of productivity' was accorded second priority by the respondents. On other hand, respondents of AAI and ECIL also opined that the need for adapting oneself to changes in work environment compelled executives to undergo training.
www.ijmer.in
218
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015 Table 2 Independent Samples T-Test on Respondent’s opinion on Need for Training Particulars
Organization
Mean
Std. Deviation
AAI
2.5
1.239
ECIL
2.3
1.427
AAI
3
1.211
ECIL
3.8
1.176
AAI
3.9
1.123
ECIL
3.9
1.362
AAI
3.4
1.165
ECIL
3.6
1.17
AAI
2.4
0.992
ECIL
2
1.096
To update Job related knowledge
To acquire newer skills to perform the job more effectively
To adjust and adapt oneself to change in work environment
To reach higher levels of productivity
To get better understanding of dynamics of human relations
t-test for Equality of Means Sig. (2t df tailed) Equal variances assumed Equal variances not assumed Equal variances assumed Equal variances not assumed Equal variances assumed Equal variances not assumed Equal variances assumed Equal variances not assumed Equal variances assumed Equal variances not assumed
0.25
348
0.806
0.25
305.9
0.805
1.73
348
0.086
1.73
318.54
0.086
0.52
348
0.607
0.52
330.61
0.606
0.62
348
0.54
0.62
324.88
0.54
0.96
348
0.339
0.96
331.61
0.339
From the above table it is evident that in all the aspects of the study on Opinion on need for training is found to among the select organizations.
www.ijmer.in
219
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Hence the hypothesis is accepted that there is no significant difference in the mean scores Respondents opinion on need for training as practiced at AAI and ECIL. Results of the study 1. Of the respondents opinion in the AAI and ECIL it proves that there is no significant difference in the mean scores Respondents opinion on need for training as practiced at AAI and ECIL. 2. For the executive level of training the employees need to update the job related knowledge shown at the value at (0.806) in AAI it proves accepted, the value at (0.805) in ECIL accepted
it proves
3. To acquire newer skills to perform the job more effectively shown the value at (0.086) in AAI the hypothesis proves accepted, the value at (0.086) in ECIL the hypothesis proves accepted. 4. To adjust and adapt oneself to change in work environment shown the value at (0.607) in AAI the hypothesis proves accepted. the value at (0.606) in ECIL the hypothesis proves accepted. 5. To reach higher levels of productivity shown the value at (0.54) in AAI the hypothesis proves accepted, the value at (0.54) in ECIL the hypothesis proves accepted. 6. To get better understanding of dynamics of human relations the value is (0.339) the hypothesis provesaccepted, the value at (0.339) in ECIL the hypothesis proves accepted.
www.ijmer.in
220
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Findings of the study The Executives of the companies under study have been deputed now and then for specialized and advanced training outside their companies within the country and none was observed to have been sent abroad for this purpose. Also it is noted that during the 5 year period, few Executives were sent for out company training programmes. The reasons being that In respect of AAI adequate training facilities have been created within the organization to train Executives in many technical and managerial skills. Moreover, the company as built using the latest technology and hence the need to depute Executives, for outcompany training was considered unnecessary. But in the case of ECIL, there is every need to depute more and more number of Executives for out-company training in order to enable them to gain latest knowledge in the developments taking place outside the company. The managements of these organizations should realize the need to depute their Executives for out-company training so as to enable them to keep abreast with latest technological advances and emulate the value systems that are considered to be the strength of other organizations. Suggestions 1. Need for the training as perceived by the respondents was elicited. It is observed that, Executives assigned highest priority for their need to undergo training in order to adjust and adopt themselves to change in work environment. 2. The other factors in the order of their importance include, to reach higher levels of productivity, acquire newer skills to perform their jobs more effectively, need to obtain job knowledge and better understanding of dynamics of human relations. 3. The Executives are well aware of the aspects in which they need training and their priority.
www.ijmer.in
221
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
4. The desirable and effective methods of identifying training needs of Executives were enquired into. More than 50 percent of the respondents were of the view that holding discussions with Executives themselves could better identify the training need. Conclusion The organizations covered by the study have well laid HR policies and procedures and manpower training. All the managements have high level of concern and commitment for human resource development. Nevertheless, these policies and procedures did not clearly envisage the training of Executives even though it is realized that this segment of managerial personnel exert a lot of influence on the productivity of workforce at shop level. No organizations made any specific budget provision for training of Executives. Even through training expenditure of Executives is met from the overall training budget, the per capita training expenditure on Executives decreased over the years while their number increased. A separate training budget for Executives more progressively in the successive years and thereby makes the training programmes more qualitative. The Executives have been showing a good deal of enthusiasm to improve their skills by undergoing training. This has got to be sustained by creating some opportunities for their speedy promotion if they are found suitable, lest there are chances of the Executives getting frustrated. They can also be motivated by providing monetary benefits if their post-training performance levels are found to be appreciable. References 1. Divina M. Edralin, (2011)Training and Development practices of large Philippines companies Asia Pacific Business Review Vol. 17, No.2. April 2011, 225-239.
www.ijmer.in
222
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
2. Julio-Septiembre (2012),Olivia Hernandez Pozas, Kety Lourdes JaureguiA Snapshot of training practices in Peru studios gerenciales, Vol.28, No.124, pp. 67-85; (Cynthia L. Gramm & John F. Schnell 2013). 3. Geraldine Kennett (2013)The Impact of Training Practices of Individual, Organisation and Industry Skill Development ABL Vol 9 No 1 2013 pp.112-135. 4. Alejandro Drexler, Greg Fischer, and Antoinetter Schoar (2014) Keeping It Simple: Financial Literacy and Rules of Thumb American Economic Journal: Applied Economics, 6(2): 1-31 dttp://dx.doi.org/10.1257/app.6.2.1 5. Rolf P. Lynton & Udai Pareek, (2000). Training for Organizational Transformation. New Delhi. Sage Publications, P. 214. 6. Sampath Kumar, 1989, (May – June 1989). Training Role in training Conceptual Guidelines. New Delhi: IJTD.ISTD. Vol XIX. No. 3. P37 7. Satish Pai, (1999). HRD skills for organizational Excellence. Mumbai: Himalaya. P.3. 8. Scott B. Parry, (1997). Evaluating the Impact of Training: A Collection of Tools & Techniques. US. ASTD. P. No. 5. 9. Singh, (1992). Human Resources Development : A Case Study of UP Electronics Corporation Ltd., Jaipur: Rawat Publications. P. 51. 10. Steinmetz, Lawrence, (1969), Managing the marginal and unsatisfactory performer, Reading, MA Addison – Wesley Publishing Company
www.ijmer.in
223
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
WORKFORCE DIVERSITY DIMENSIONS AND IT’S IMPACT ON PHARMACEUTICAL COMPANIES P.Jayasudha
Dr.G.Manchala
Research Scholar Department of Human Resource Management Acharya Nagarjuna University Guntur, Andhra Pradesh
Professor Vignan Jyothi Institute of Management Hyderabad Telengana State
INTRODUCTION Pharmaceutical companies who want to stay in the competition realized that the best performing companies are the companies with well-built diversity strategies and practices linked with the business, and have developed fitting organizational plans and recruiting efforts to fight the competition. Kristin Rand (2012). To accommodate the shift in demographics, many organizations have increased their efforts and investments to recruit and train a more diverse workforce. As opportunities for global expansion and outsourcing increase, so does the trend to more diversity in the workplace. Eileen M. Trauth, Haiyan Huang, Jeria L. Quesenberry , Allison J. Morgan (2006). If Indian companies have to flourish in today’s shifting global market place, they have to be taught to manage diversity, both within the organizations and without. Dr. Sunanda Jindal, Prof. S.D. Bagade, & Dr. Prabha Sharma (2013). India has seen demographic changes significantly in the past twenty years; people in good number from traditional agriculture society have joined the ranks of the middle class. In traditionally male dominated areas a large number of women are being employed. OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY 1) To investigate whether there exist any statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimension (Gender) across three Pharmacy companies.
www.ijmer.in
224
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
2) To know whether there exist any statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimension (Age) between Pharmacy companies. 3) To determine whether there exist any statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimension (Education background) across three Pharmacy companies. 4) To study whether there is any statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimensions (Gender, Age and Education background) and among three Pharmacy companies. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY SAMPLE: For the study, the population consisted of employees from three Pharmacy companies, 400 questionnaires were distributed but only 150 questionnaires were received by the investigator in return. Therefore the Sample Size for the study is 150. DATA COLLECTION PROCEDURE: This research depends on two instruments: For measuring diversity dimensions a modified self-administered questionnaire (Eugene Chew Weiliang, Lee Kah Mun, Tan Siew Chern, Tee Say Fong, Yang Pik Yuan, 2011) was adopted and the questionnaire consists of 21 statements. A 5-point Likert scale, ranging from 1 (“strongly disagree”) to 5 (“strongly agree”) was used to record the opinions of the respondents. STATISTICAL TOOLS: Statistical Methods such as Descriptive and ANOVA analysis was used in order to test the significant difference between Workforce diversity dimensions and Pharmacy companies. SPSS software tool was employed to serve the purpose. The reliability and internal consistency www.ijmer.in
225
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
among the items of the questionnaire was tested using the reliability scale Cronbach’s Alpha. HYPOTHESIS OF THE STUDY H0: There is no statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimensions (Gender, Age and Education background) and among three Pharmacy Companies. H1: There is statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimensions (Gender, Age and Education background) and among three Pharmacy Companies. REVIEW OF LITERATURE For every organization with the goal to become employer of the choice, to maintain a competitive edge or to provide excellent service to customers, there is a need to recognize and regard workforce diversity as the most important organizational resource. Diversity is an increasingly important factor in organizational life as organizations worldwide become more diverse in terms of the gender, race, ethnicity, age, national origin and other personal characteristics of their members (Shaw and Barrett-Power, 1998).Diversity in the workforce can be a competitive advantage because different viewpoints can facilitate unique and creative approaches to problem-solving, thereby increasing creativity and innovation, which in turn leads to better organizational performance (Allen et al., 2004). Managing diversity promotes competitive edge by recruiting the best people for the job, regardless of ethnicity, age, gender or other individual characteristics (Cornelius, 1999). Twenty-first century organizations are challenged by diversity in many arenas. Demographic changes in workforce composition and customer populations, combined with globalized markets and international competition are increasing the amount of diversity organizations must manage, both internally and externally (Patricia A. Kreitz, 2007). www.ijmer.in
226
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
According to Nelson, 1997, Diversity encompasses all forms of difference among individuals, including, gender, age, ability, religious affiliation, personality, economic class, social status, military attachments, and sexual orientation and Litvin, 1997, Defines Divesity as age, ethnicity, gender, physical attributes/abilities, race, sexual orientation, educational background, geographical location, income, marital status, military experience, parental status, religious beliefs and work experience. The term diversity management originated in North America but has slowly taken hold in other regions and countries of the world (e.g., Hays- Thomas, 2004; Kaiser & Prange, 2004; Nyambegera, 2002; Ozbilgin & Tatli , 2008; Palmer, 2003; Palmi, 2001). The terms “diversity management” and “Managing diversity” came into use in the United States in the 1980s. The diversity management field emerged in the 1990s. Liberalization and globalization gave rise to a new trend in 1990s in the form of workforce diversity. The overall managing diversity “movement” was a response in organizational decisionmaking and management processes both to, The demands raised by the civil-rights and women’s liberation movements, Supreme Court rulings, and federal civil rights, equal opportunity, and affirmative legislation and regulation in the 1950s and 1960s and The recognition of competitive and economic self-interest by organizations for effectively managing the differences represented by an increasingly diverse workforce. Michael Brazzel. (2003). Diversity programs are different from Affirmative Action and Equal Employment Opportunity programs (Slack, James D., 1997). Diversity management is a process intended to create and maintain a positive work environment where the similarities and differences of individuals are valued, so that all can reach their potential and maximize their contributions to an organization’s strategic goals and objectives (Harold Andrew Patrick and Vincent Raj Kumar, 2012).If the workforce profile www.ijmer.in
227
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
in an organization is composed of worker groups which show differences depending on demographic or other characteristics, diversity emerges. The criteria discriminating these groups include race, geographic origin, ethnicity, gender, age, functional or educational background, physical and cognitive capability, language, lifestyles, beliefs, cultural background, economic category, tenure with the organization and sexual preference (Dessler, 1998; Galagan, 1991:1/9; Bhadury et al., 2000). Cox (1993) defines diversity management as the development and implementation of organizational systems and practices to manage people so that potential advantages of diversity are maximized while its potential disadvantages are minimized to the lowest level possible. Diversity management is an approach explicitly concerned with the integration of people management issues with business issues and the development of work- place culture that acknowledges the necessity to manage the similarities and differences between contributors to the enterprise (Kramar, 1998). Theories and techniques of diversity management have been developed and enthusiastically supported by a growing number of chief executives, training specialists, diversity consultants and academics (Saji, 2004). Diversity management emphasizes building specific skills, creating policies and drafting practices that get the best from every employee. It assumes a coherent environment in organizations and aims for effectiveness, productivity and ultimately competitive advantage (Brian D'Netto and Amrik S. Sohal, 1999). DIFFERENT SETS OF DIMENSIONS OF DIVERSITY Marilyn Loden and Judy B. Rosener (1996). Define Diversity as “which differentiates one group of people from another along primary and secondary dimensions. There are generally two levels of diversity, which are divided into primary and secondary dimensions. (Baytos
www.ijmer.in
228
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
1995; Loden 1996). Primary dimensions include inborn differences or differences that have an impact throughout one’s life. These are the core dimensions that help the people to shape their self-image and view of the world. Age, race, ethnicity, gender, mental or physical abilities and sexual orientation include primary dimensions. The primary dimensions of diversity are characteristics, which are inborn and immutable. These are: Gender, Race, Country of origin, Age, Physical challenge, Sexual Orientation. These six criteria are viewed as primary dimensions that impact individual values, opinions and perceptions of self and others at work. (Loden, 1996). The secondary dimensions of diversity are virtually limitless array of individual characteristics. A few of these characteristics that are associated with life in our organizations include the following: Education, Work Experience, Marital/parental status, Functional specialty, Location, Religion, Problem solving approach, Leadership Style, Communication Style, First Language, Military Experience, Organization role and level, Income. These are those that can be acquired or changed throughout one’s lifetime. These secondary dimensions play an important role in shaping our values, expectations and experiences. These dimensions also tend to be more mutable, less visible to those around us, and are more variable in the degree of influence they exert on our individual lives (Loden 1996). RESULT ANALYSIS DESCRIPTIVE ANALYSIS OF RESPONDENT DEMOGRAPHIC PROFILE: The respondents were asked questions about their demographic profile, including gender, age, education level, working experience (in years), and position level in the organization in the questionnaire. In this section analysis of the demographic characteristics of the respondents
www.ijmer.in
229
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
based on frequency analysis of the demographic characteristics of the respondents based on frequency analysis is discussed. 27.3% of the respondents comprise of female and the remaining 72.7 % of them are males. In other words, from the 150 respondents of Pharmaceutical industry, 41 of them are female while the remaining 109 are male. As women do not prefer to work in pharmaceutical industry because of health hazards, the proportion of female to male varies a lot. The majority of respondents come from Post graduation with 59.3%, followed by bachelor’s degree with 26.7%. PhD holders accounts to 8% of respondents, diploma holders to 4% and others to 3%. Most of the respondents are Post graduates because pharmaceutical companies prefer post graduates as this field expects expertise in the subject, which is learned through their specialization.38% have work experience of 1-2 years, which amounts to the highest proportion of all respondents, followed by 3-5 years with 26.7%, next follows the respondents having 6 - 10 years with 16.7%. While 10.7% of them have work experience of 11-20 years, the percentage of the respondents holding experience less than one year is 6% and more than 20 years is2%.The majority of the respondents falls under the generation group born after 1980 that is generation Y accounting to 68.7% out of 150 respondents, followed by the generation group born between 1965 and 1980 i.e., generation X with 26.7% or 16 respondents from 150.4.7% of the respondents fall under the generation of baby boomers. The majority of the respondents fall under senior executives with 38.7%, followed by Executives with 30.7% and mangers with 18%. While 10% of the respondents fall under entry level and 2.7% of the respondents are senior managers.
www.ijmer.in
230
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
SCALE MEASUREMENT PILOT STUDY Reliability of the questionnaire was tested as well using reliability test with the help of Statistical Package for Social Science (SPSS) software. There are three constructs and total of 21 items were tested for internal consistency using Cronbach’s alpha in the questionnaire. The item with Cronbach’s alpha value closer to 1 is considered to be having higher internal consistency. For Pharmaceutical sector, the constructs of gender is measured by using 9 items and shows a coefficient alpha at 0.836. Second constructs which is age, measured by using 5 items gives coefficient alpha at 0.780. Third, the education background shows coefficient alpha at 0.728 which is measured by using 7 items. INFERENTIAL ANALYSIS ANOVA ANALYSIS: In this section ANOVA analysis is used. One way ANOVA test was conducted to determine whether the three Pharmacy companies differ from each other when it comes to Gender diversity, Age diversity, Educational Background. 1) H0: There is no statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimension (Gender) and among three Pharmacy Companies. H1: There is statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimension (Gender) and among three Pharmacy Companies. Pharmaceutical-Sector and Gender diversity: One way ANOVA test was conducted to determine whether the three Pharmacy companies differ from each other when it comes to Gender diversity www.ijmer.in
231
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
The results in Table1 shows that 50 employees were participated in the survey from the organization Dr.Reddy’s Laboratories with gender diversity mean score of 3.64 and a standard deviation of 0.630. 50 employees were participated in the survey from the organization Aurobindo Pharmaceuticals with gender diversity mean score of 3.57 and a standard deviation of 0.634. 50 employees were participated in the survey from the organization Hetero Drugs Ltd with gender diversity mean score of 3.94 and a standard deviation of 0.632. As it can be seen from the table2, the results regarding the organization, that there is a significant difference in gender diversity among employees of three Pharmacy companies (F = 4.771; df = 2/147; p<0.05). 2) H0: There is no statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimension (Age) and among three Pharmacy Companies. H1: There is statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimension (Age) and among three Pharmacy Companies.
www.ijmer.in
232
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Variable
Company Name
N
Mean
Gender Diversity
Dr.Reddy's Laboratory Aurobindo Pharmaceutical Hetero Drugs Ltd Total
50 50 50 150
3.642222 3.575556 3.942222 3.720000
Standard deviation .6302567 .6344006 .6322324 .6481035
Age Diversity
Dr.Reddy's Laboratory Aurobindo Pharmaceutical Hetero Drugs Ltd Total
50 50 50 15
3.600000 3.612000 4.348000 3.853333
.5910903 .7606764 .6475196 .7525051
Education background Diversity
Dr.Reddy's Laboratory Aurobindo Pharmaceutical Hetero Drugs Ltd Total
50 50 50 15
3.597143 3.534286 3.391429 3.507619
.6058785 .5398027 .8824307 .6928790
Diversity Group
Dr.Reddy's Laboratory Aurobindo Pharmaceutical Hetero Drugs Ltd Total
50 50 50 150
3.617143 3.570476 3.855238 3.680952
.5174506 .5391336 .4823662 .5251805
www.ijmer.in
233
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Pharmaceutical-Sector and Age diversity: One way ANOVA test was conducted to determine whether the three Pharmacy companies differ from each other when it comes to age diversity. Table 1: Mean and Standard deviation results of for the Pharmacy companies employees. The results in Table1 shows that 50 employees were participated in the survey from the organization Dr.Reddy’s Laboratories with gender diversity mean score of 3.60 and a standard deviation of 0.591. 50 employees were participated in the survey from the organization Aurobindo Pharmaceuticals with gender diversity mean score of 3.61 and a standard deviation of 0.760. 50 employees were participated in the survey from the organization Hetero Drugs Ltd with gender diversity mean score of 4.34 and a standard deviation of 0.647. As can be seen from the tabl2e, the results regarding the organization, that there is a significant difference in age diversity among employees from three pharmacy companies (F=20.436; df = 2/147; p<0.01).
www.ijmer.in
234
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Variable Gender Diversity
Age Diversity
Education background Diversity
Diversity Group
www.ijmer.in
Company Name
Sum of Squares
Mean Square
df
Between groups
3.815
2
1.907
Within Groups
58.771
147
.400
Total
62.586
149
Between groups
18.356
2
9.178
Within Groups
66.018
147
.449
Total
84.373
149
Between groups
1.111
2
.556
Within Groups
70.421
147
.479
Total
71.532
149
Between groups
2.333
2
1.166
Within Groups
38.764
147
.264
Total
41.096
149
F
Sig. 4.771
.010
20.436
.000
1.160
.316
4.423
.014
235
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Table 2: Sum of Squares, Mean squares and F-ratios of Gender diversity, Age diversity, Education background diversity, Diversity sum variable for the Pharmacy companies’ employees. 3) H0: There is no statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimension (Education Background) and among three pharmacy Companies. H1: There is statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimension (Education Background) and pharmacy Companies.
among three
Pharmaceutical-Sector and Education background diversity: One way ANOVA test was conducted to determine whether the three pharmacy companies differ from each other when it comes to education background diversity. The results in Table1 shows that the organization Dr.Reddy’ Laboratories, has a mean score of 3.59 and a standard deviation of 0.605, the organization Aurobindo Pharmaceuticals, has a mean score of 3.53 and a standard deviation of 0.539 and the organization Hetero Drugs Ltd. with education background diversity mean score of 3.39 and a standard deviation of 0.882. As can be seen from the table2, the results regarding the organization, that there is no significant difference in education background diversity among employees from three Pharmacy companies (F=1.160; df = 2/147; p>0.05). 4) H0: There is no statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimensions (Gender, Age and Education background) and among three pharmacy Companies. H1: There is statistically significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimensions (Gender, Age and Education background) and among three pharmacy Companies. www.ijmer.in
236
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Pharmaceutical-Sector and Diversity sum variable (Gender, Age and Education background): One way ANOVA test was conducted to determine whether the three pharmaceutical companies differ from each other when it comes to diversity sum variable. The results in Table1 shows that the organization Dr.Reddy’ Laboratories, has a mean score of 3.61 and a standard deviation of 0.517, the organization Aurobindo Pharmaceuticals, has a mean score of 3.57 and a standard deviation of 0.539 and the organization Hetero Drugs Ltd. with diversity sum variable mean score of 3.81 and a standard deviation of 0.482. As can be seen from the table2, the results regarding the organization, that there is a significant difference in diversity sum variable among employees from three pharmaceutical companies (F = 4.423; df = 2/147; p<0.05). FINDINGS AND SUGGESTIONS From the result analysis we observe that there is a significant difference on perceived workforce diversity dimensions (Gender, Age and Education background) across various Pharmacy companies. These significant differences among the companies make the pharmacy companies in identification of various methods to handle the various dimensions of diversity. This helps the companies to concentrate to identify and acknowledge the kinds of diversity that are important. There is a need for the companies to work with different participants to understand their own “business case”. There is a necessity to communicate what they are doing to employees, customers, clients, investors, funders etc. Companies must make sure that people know what diversity means to them and their work. Organizations should develop policies and practices that reflect and implement their
www.ijmer.in
237
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
commitment to managing diversity. Organizations must build the support and trust from people inside and outside the organization. CONCLUSION With Globalization not only IT sector is experiencing more demographical changes but pharmacy companies too are undergoing these. Therefore there is necessity for pharmacy companies to embrace diversity initiatives and strategies to acquire diverse group. There is a need for companies to value diversity for a number of reasons, such as to give the organization access to a broader range of opinions and view points, to reflect an increasingly diverse customer base to obtain the best talent in a competitive environment. By accepting and understanding differences employees reap tangible and intangible benefits from workplace benefits, which include respect and value from co-workers and business gains. Embracing diversity in organizations helps in developing positive relationships that lead to positive human relations and work success. Companies that diversify their workforces will have a distinct competitive advantage over those that do not, especially in the coming years. There are several predominant factors that motivate companies to have diverse workforces. References 1)
2)
3)
Kristin Rand, (2012), “Diverse Talent Recognizes Pharma’s Efforts to Create More Diverse Workforce” IM Diversity, on Oct 27, 2012 in Healthcare . Eileen M. Trauth, Haiyan Huang, Jeria L. Quesenberry, Allison J. Morgan (2006). Leveraging Diversity in Information Systems and Technology Education in the Global Workplace, Chapter No. 2, Information Systems and Technology Education: From the University to the Workplace, 21 July 2006. Dr. Sunanda Jindal, Prof. S.D. Bagade, and Dr. Prabha Sharma (2013), “Impact of Work Force Diversity on Work Culture of Indian Organizations”, Journal of Business Management & Social Sciences Research (JBM&SSR) ISSN No: 2319‐5614, Volume 2, No.7, July 2013.
www.ijmer.in
238
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
4)
5)
6) 7)
8)
9)
10) 11) 12)
13)
14)
15)
16) 17)
Shaw, J.B. and Barrett-Power, E. (1998), ``The effects of diversity on small work group processes and performance'', Human Relations, Vol. 51 No.10, pp. 1307-25. Shaw, J.B. and Barrett-Power, E. (1998), ``The effects of diversity on small work group processes and performance'', Human Relations, Vol. 51 No.10, pp. 1307-25. LITVIN, D.R. (1997) “The Discourse of Diversity: from Biology to Management” Organization 4 (2); 187-210 Patricia A. Kreitz (2007): “Best Practices for Managing Organizational Diversity”,Director, Technical Information Services Stanford Linear Accelerator Center, Stanford University Stanford, CA 94309 [email protected], may 2007. Allen R, Dawson G, Wheatley K, White,CS (2004). Diversity Practices: Learning Responses for Modern Organisation, Development and Learning in Organisations: An Int. J. 18 (6): pp.13-15. Debra L.Nelson and James Campbell Quick (2007). “Organization behavior”, Foundations, realities and challenges, 5th edition, Thomson publication, pp46. Cox, T. Jr. (1993). Cultural Diversity in Organisations: Theory, Research and Practice. San Francisco: Berrett-Koehler Publishers. Kramar, R. (1998). Managing Diversity: Beyond Affirmative Action in Australia. Women in Management Review, 13(4), 133-142. Slack, James D. (Fall 1997). Review of Public Administration. “From Affirmative Action to Full Spectrum Diversity in the American Workplace,” pages 75-87. Michael Brazzel. (2003). “HISTORICAL AND THEORETICAL ROOTS OF DIVERSITY MANAGEMENT”, Chapter II in Deborah L. Plummer, Handbook of Diversity Management: Beyond Awareness to Competency Based Learning (Ed.), Lanham, MD: University Press of America, Inc., 2003, pp. 51-93. Eugene Chew Weiliang, Lee Kah Mun, Tan Siew Chern, Tee Say Fong, Yang Pik Yuan, (2011), “The Effects Of Workforce Diversity Towards The Employee Performance In An Organization”, Universiti Tunku Abdul Rahman, August 2011. Harold Andrew Patrick, Vincent Raj Kumar. (2012). Managing Workplace Diversity,Issues and Challenges. Sage Journals, DOI: 10.1177/2158244012444615, Published 25 April 2012. Galagan, P.A. (1991) ‘‘Tapping the power of a diverse workforce’’, Training & Development, Vol. 45 No. 3. Dessler, G. (1998), Management, int. ed., Prentice-Hall, Inc., New Jersey, NJ.
www.ijmer.in
239
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
18)
19) 20)
Bhadury, J., Mighty, E.J. and Damar, H. (2000), ‘‘Maximizing workforce diversity in project teams: a network flow approach’’, Omega, Vol. 28, pp. 143-53. Loden, Marily (1996). Implementing Diversity. Chicago, IL: Irwin Professional Publishing. Marilyn Loden and Judy B. Rosener (1996), Workforce America! (Home wood, Ill.: Business One Irwin, 1991); and Marilyn Loden, Implementing Diversity (Home wood, Ill.: Irwin, 1996)
www.ijmer.in
240
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
MANAGEMENT OF EXECUTIVE STRESS
Prof.K. John Head Department of Human Resource Management Andhra University Visakhapatnam
N Jayalakshmi Research Fellow Department of Human Resource Management Andhra University Visakhapatnam
Introduction Manager is a person who exercises control over all resources, which includes material and human resources. Thus, a manager who has to control men, resources, etc should have basically control over himself. According to a study carried out by “Fortune” magazine, the quality which differentiates most successful managers from others is "their stability under pressure'. Stress is an ancient phenomenon causing a great concern for the modern man. It is something as old as "man" himself. It starts with his necessity for survival, but if it is not kept under proper limits, it may cause a threat to his own survival. If we were to go back and observe the life and conditions of our forefathers, we would see small, well-knit, organized units of social organizations at various levels: such as village which was self-contained and flourishing in all respects. In contrast, the modern social structure portrays a completely paradoxical picture. The emergence of the various scientific, industrial and technological revolutions on the scene has completely changed the pattern of life all over the world. Large business and industrial organizations emerged wherein workforce in thousands, with diverse backgrounds (educational, economic, cultural, family status, personalities, etc.) the need to work under a common roof for common objectives had. This formal organizational life has become the order of the present day civilization. Today every organization has to endlessly strive to cater to the demands of the ever changing society. As a result of www.ijmer.in
241
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
this dynamism with which the modern organizations work, their employees are also spun around with the same speed, who are thus under constant pressure to update their skills to remain in the fray. Thus, the jobs in the modern organizations are very exacting and challenging. Objectives of Study: 1. To understand the conceptual view of stress. 2. To analyze the stress in various stages. 3. To identity the causes of stress. 4. To view the concept of executive stress. 5. To analyze and evaluate the consequence of executive stress. Methodology: This study is based on the descriptive analysis of the problems related stress management. The study will also focus on how these contribute the segment of stress management strategies. It is a content study done on the basis of the secondary data gathered from the articles, books and also website. The main purpose of this research is the description of the state of affairs as it exists at present. This study is based on the generalization of the events. Stress - A conceptual view Stress has its origin in the demands of organizational and personal life. Any demand either of a physical or psychological nature, encountered in the course of living stimulates a response in the individual. This response known as stress response is a generalized, 'patterned and unconscious mobilization of the body's natural energy resources. Stress is thus a consequence of a response to an action, situation, or force that places special demands. Stress is, thus, the change in the state of the internal system which results from external stress.
www.ijmer.in
242
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Meaning of Stress: Stress is any strain or exertion or interference that disturbs the functioning of the organism. (Encyclopedia of Britannica). In a survey conducted (Anwell Ward), managers were asked "What do you mean by stress? the following responses emerged:
Too much work and too little time to do it
A feeling of anxiety
Being unable to cope with situations and people
Too much pressure
Feeling tired and irritable
Emotional pressures
Stages of stress: Stress is essentially a bodily response or a reaction to an external factor (Hans Selye, 1978).The response may be of the nature of fight or flight. The response has three stages: (1) Alarm Stage, (2) Resistance Stage, and (3) Exhaustion Stage.
In the first stage, the brain recognizes the stimulus (a threat in www.ijmer.in
243
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
some form) which signals the pituitary gland to produce more hormones, move to the blood and cause the adrenalin and other hormones. As a result, the heart rate is affected, the blood pressure rises and the sugar level in the blood rises. If the response is extremely drastic, death may occur. If the initial stage is survived,: the second - resistance follows. Now the fight is one. The body combats the stimulus or .hastens to avoid it and begins to repair the damage. But if the same .stimulus continues, the third stage exhaustion sets in. If it is completely used up, the body faces exhaustion and in the long run, senility and finally death. Personality and Stress: Personality is the stimulus that causes people to behave in certain ways; Research has shown that stress has its: roots in the personality of individuals who respond to stimuli in environment in certain emotional ways. Human Personality is categorized into two: Type A and B which throws more light with special reference to incidence of stress. Type A person is briskly self-confident, very decisive, never dawdling. They are aggressive, ambitious, and highly competitive. They have an intense drive that they must chase schedules, self compulsion to overwork and often neglect other aspects of their lives, such as family, social events, leisure and recreational activities. They tend to use various words in their sentences and talk very fast and also expect others to talk the same way. They feed words into others' mouths when they speak slowly. They are very aggressive with hostile feelings and love competition. They are very conscious of time, punctual and cannot tolerate waiting. Type B person may be just as serious, but is much more easy going and is able to enjoy leisure. He has no feelings of being driven. Type A person is compared to hare and type B person to Tortoise. Indian approach to human personality maintains that human beings can be classified into three types: Satwic, Rajasic, and Tamasicon the basis of Guna (attributes) and Karma (actions) (2.40 Bhagavad Githa). www.ijmer.in
244
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Causes and Effects of Stress The stimulus or stress causing factors are called stressors. A stressor is, thus, defined as a stress event that leads to a response or reaction" which produces effects for the individual and stress may be distinctively defined as "a condition of tension brought about by man's reaction to an internal or external event or situation." It is to be noted that the stressors are internal (personality factors) as well as external. Stressors are of various types — physical, mental, emotional and spiritual. Stressors may be pleasant or unpleasant, depending on the event itself or the perception of the individual. Stress resulting from pleasant stressors is termed as 'Eustress' and that from unpleasant ones 'Distress' (Quick and Quick, 1979). Therefore, eustress results in a feeling of wellbeing, while distress in dissonance in an individual. It is to be noted that so much depends on how one responds to the stressor / pressure. It is the head that perceives and the heart that receives. It is not simple to understand the influence of different factors that cause stress in an individual. Organizational and Executive stress: Organizational stress may be defined as: the "general, patterned, unconscious mobilization of the individual's energy when confronted with any work or organizational demand." Executive Stress may be defined as a "response to a stress or a set of circumstances that induces a change in the individual's ongoing physiological and psychological functioning" (Quick and Quick). Stress has almost become a part and parcel of the life of a modern executive, a rule rather than an exception. Stress need not be viewed only from a negative angle as it also has a positive side. Stress is an essential accompaniment to executive performance. Stress is a very bad master, but a very good servant (Pestonjee, D.M., 1975). Stress when streamlined can add to quality of work. If, however, it overtakes us, it can cause problems with performance, upset relations and even the physical, well-being of the www.ijmer.in
245
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
individual. The new line of research that deals exclusively with executive stress, focuses on the role of the' individual in the organization and the stresses which he experiences due to various organizational stressors. Unstructured jobs, complexity, variety, challenge, pressure, etc., which were considered undesirable a few decades back are now regarded as motivating factors by some of the high fly executives. Organizations are, therefore, deliberately engineering situations so as to give opportunity to premium executives in organizations to prove their excellence and superiority over others in order to outsmart and climb the organizational ladder faster. The major / essential dimensions of stress in a manager's job are the stress situations. Consequences of stress: The executive who has no control over his stress loses control over himself. He goes astray and drives every body around him astray. Thus, the consequences of executive stress are to be faced by both the individual executive concerned as well as the organization. Individual consequences could be of the nature of: 1. Behavioral (lack of self-esteem sense of inadequacy, etc.), 2. Psychological (sleep disturbances, respiratory problems, unspecified body pains, etc.), and 3. Medical / Health Consequences (headaches, backaches, high blood pressure, heart troubles, allergies, obesity, epilepsy, etc.). Organization AL consequences could be of the nature of: distrust, irresponsibility, resentment, role conflict, suspicion, inflexibility, cynicism, expression of dissatisfaction, irritability, disloyalty, alienation, meanness, detachment apathy,insecurity,loneliness,poorjudgment,boredom,helplessness,restles sness, self-image, shyness, need to be needed, nervousness, prejudiced, hostile, vindictive, arrogance, and argumentative. The above attitudes result in: absenteeism, tardiness, hurdle to work progress, and turnover. Besides the effects on the organizational performance will be: a) quality of work suffers, b) quantity of work decreases, c) accidents at work place increase, d) grievances and: complaints increase, arid e) loss of vitality. www.ijmer.in
246
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Issues Causing Stress in Organizational Life: The respondent executives earlier perceived that the amount of stress experienced by the executives was 'moderate'. The study sought views of executives on ten important facets of organization (organizational environment, methods and practices) that have bearing on executive stress. The respondent executives expressed the opinion that: their organizational culture promotes growth and healthy competition among their employees; their authority commensurate with the responsibility given to them; and that their job is exciting and challenging "to a moderate extent’. Values and stress: Values of people have bearing on their work philosophy in an organization. When they were requested to express their opinion about their work in the organization, majority of them reported that they consider their work as duty. Some of them also said that they regard the work as worship'. Majority of them also reported that they derive maximum satisfaction from hard and honest work, while some confessed that they engage in work for personal image and good will. They also expressed the opinion that the executives in their organizations suffer from stress to some extent', and that they are in favor of introduction of stress management programs in their organizations. They expressed the following views about 'Doctrine of Karma’:
Helps developing positive attitude
A convenient philosophy
Promotes negative attitude to work When the executives were further questioned about the purpose
of above perceptions, they explained in the following manner. They mentioned the strong conviction which permeates the Indian psyche —that body is a result of past karmas. Karma (which is called 'work' in www.ijmer.in
247
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
English language) is the means to wear out the balance of 'PRARABDHA KARMA' accumulated over births, which subjects an -individual 'Jivi' to births and deaths. So karma impels an individual soul to take birth after birth to seek ways and means for salvation. Work, therefore, results in 'chittasuddhi', cleansing of one's consciousness. This karmic attitude is the basis for the formation of positive attitude towards work and life. Indians are able to withstand all the “adversities of life with a smile on face because of their 'high tolerance'—the foundation being Indian Culture. Management of Executive Stress —Different Perspectives It is in the interest of the organization to understand scientifically the nature and role of stressors which are experienced by the executives. Dysfunctional stressors which do not allow executives to operate with maximum efficiency should be seriously dealt by the authorities to promote operational efficiency of the whole organization. The basic purpose of stress management should be to convert the dysfunctional stressors into functional ones so that higher rates and quality of performance can be obtained without negative consequences for the executive and the organization. Preventive management is an organizational philosophy and set of principles which employs specific methods for promoting individual and organizational health while preventing individual and organizational distress. It is concerned with how organizations adapt and respond to change and growth. It is oriented to deal with stress in a proactive manner. It is a responsive change in which the organization should anticipate and avert most crises. It does not react, but shapes event. It should: 1. Reduce unnecessary demands on the individuals. 2. It should help executives manage reasonable demands and co-operate with them 3. When individuals tail, it should rescue people through treatment at www.ijmer.in
248
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
the right time. Preventive management does not end with changing organizational policies or strategies to reduce unnecessary demands but also help the individual executives to cope with unnecessary stress. Thus preventive management also calls for "stress coping at the individual level too", where the organization should provide the necessary : 1) awareness, 2) initiative, 3) knowledge and expertise and 4) the facilities for managing executive stress/ Adopting strategies at organizational levels may not improve things for the executives who have diverse expectations, but a single policy to reign overall. Unless the executive alters/ improves his perception and appraisal systems within him, he will continue to perceive even the revised environment as opposed to him. On the other hand, it will be better if the individual helps himself and feels much better rather than expect the organization to change to make him feel better. Managing stress at the individual level has three alternatives: It could be: a. Primary coping — which is .stressor directed; b. Secondary coping — which is response directed; and tertiary coping — which is symptom directed. An executive may have to use one, twoor a combination of all the three" for effective stress management in accordance with the situations. a. Managing Personal Environment Planning and controlling are two very important functions of a manager. This applies not only to his organizational resources, but also to himself. Planning life and daily schedules control his environment. The executives may sometimes be engaged in jobs which are relatively unimportant and are not able to accomplish the problem within a specified amount of time. The relationship between stress and time management arise when the executive is notable to attain or fulfill needs or desires within the specified time. The present study also found that there is correlation between stress and time management. Those executives who plan their daily schedules of work and engagements by www.ijmer.in
249
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
means of various memory aids are less prone tostress compared to those who do not plan their daily activities properly. The author humbly submits in this context that even in his own personal life he found positive correlation between stress and time management. Modern Psychology also endorses that the physical environment around us limit certain stimuli which have influence on our mind and being. The executives should arrange everything at home in proper order and in symmetry which helps him in keeping his mind clear. Similarly, the orderly and clean physical surroundings in his personal office room in particular and the division/ organization in general will help in keeping organizational mind unpolluted. So even the top-managements being aware of the significance of this factor, should give due importance to landscaping, vegetation, and interior decoration to yield higher productivity. b.Life-style Management Many researchers in stress management have suggested that one of the things that characterize relatively stress-free living is regularity. Without regularity the homeostasis of people will be imbalanced. The findings of the study also established a positive correlation between regular life style and the amount of stress. Sleep is one of the least understood of human phenomena, which consumes up to a third of each lifespan. Sleep is a natural and essential process for rejuvenating the body, and in proper proportion can bring nothing but benefit. It is only through personal experimentation |that one can find the sleep cycle which is right for him. Yoga texts, however forbid all day sleep, except in cases of illness, Sleep, during the day disturbs gases, bile, lymph and blood flow. However it, does not mean that a person, should not take rest in the afternoon— meaning rest is different from sleep. The best hours, of sleep are those from three hours after sunset to 90 minutes before, dawn. Regular sleeping habits increase health, wealth and vitality. Sleep only on the left side. Don't engage in emotional upheavals www.ijmer.in
250
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
(heated arguments, excitements, etc.) before sleep. Wash the feet before retiring —practice breathing exercises and meditation for a few minutes before retiring to bed. Never sleep with the feet pointing towards the south (Harish Johari, Op. Cit.) Thereafter, rising from bed during Brahm Muhurtha i.e. around 04:00 a.m. — 05:00 a.m. is the foremost to set the life in rhythm. On gaining consciousness, one should place his hand slightly below his nose to see which of his two nostrils is open. Once you have discovered which nostril is working, you should work with that side of the body first, for that's where the energies are more concentrated. If you are breathing through your right nostril, look at the palm of your right hand. Observe the lines and patterns. Study it closely. The power is reflected in the extraordinary proportion of the brain devoted to the hands, far exceeding most other parts of the body. After looking at your palm, kissing it and looking at your fingers, rub their tips together with the thumbs in a slow, soothing rhythm cycle. With your system now calm and relaxed, step out of bed with the same foot as the operating nostril. This sequence of motions, starting with observing and kissing your palm, forms and energy shield which wards off negative influences for the whole of the day. One can do light exercise and do meditation/ relaxation/silent sitting for 20-30 minutes. It should be borne in mind that life during the day influences the life during the sleep. So during the day. An individual should lead a modern life. Therefore, an individual should not cross the
limits
in food,
interactions, entertainment, talk, thoughts, etc. So that the homeostasis will not be imbalanced. c. Body Culture Matter in gross form is body and in minute from is mind. Since the matter pervades body as well as mind in different forms frequency, body and mind are interdependent and inter-related. So stress which is essentially associated with mind cannot be put under check unless body is purified/rejenuvated.Patanjali in his "YOGA SUTRAS" in the www.ijmer.in
251
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
"Asthanga Yoga" [1 .Yama, 2.Niyama, 3.Asana (physical postures), 4.Pranayama, 5.Pratyahara, 6.Dharana, 7.Dhyana (meditation), 8. Samadhi prescribes that body should be purified and strengthened through some physical culturing, i.e. Asanas before going in for meditation. Aerobics, jogging, skipping, and some selected yogic postures (Sarvangasan,Bhujangasan, Padmasan, Savasan, etc.) will help in making the body supple and the mind alert (Yoga: An Instruction Booklet, A Vivekananda Cendera Publication,, 1977). It should be/however, borne in mind that the aforementioned physical postures should be done under the guidance of a trained instructor in the beginning and subsequently practiced regularly. d. Relaxation Training There are various modes of relaxation : such as progressive relaxation, bio feedback, meditation and simple breathing exercises. A person under stress could sit, relax and think of a very pleasant incident or a scene (like a green field) and let not the mind wander. Such imaginary relieves insomnia, moderate pain and emotional responses to illness. This kind of relaxation can be made into a daily practice exercise. e. Native Medicines: There are some home-made medicines for managing stress within limits. The foremost among the home-made medicines is butter-milk mixed with salt to be taken from time to time which helps a lot in keeping the mind cool and the body supple. The previous night water can be stored in a copper vessel and the next morning, it should be taken as the first drink — the copper charged water is also good for health. Similarly, fresh basil (Tulasi) leaves can be soaked in water the previous night (perhaps in the same copper vessel mentioned before) which can be taken in small quantities throughout the day as a medicine. A salad made of fresh vegetables and green leaves will also be very helpful to keep one quite calm. Light tea decoction mixed with lime (nimbu) a little sugar is also good to keep emotions under check. All those who are www.ijmer.in
252
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
interested in managing or keeping the stress within limits will be benefited much in consulting a check-list regularly Methods to Cope with Stress: When the respondent executives were questioned about the various methods adopted by them to cope with stress, they gave the following responses: • Reads newspapers, novels, etc. • Spend time with friends • Watch TV. & Movies • Listen to Music • Visit places of worship • Yoga, and Meditation • Do physical exercises and play games Although they may be aware of the efficacy of various methods in the management of stress, they may be able to implement them in their daily life on account of lethargy. When they were questioned about applicability of various methods and systems — they expressed their conviction in the following manner. They reported that Indian systems such as yoga and Meditation, religious teachings and a positive spiritual attitude will help them in the prevention of stress to a large extent. They also expressed the opinion that faith in Divinity would influence future course of events and reduce uncertainty to a large extent. They admitted that stress is necessary for self-motivation to some extent beyond which it would become counterproductive. Conclusion The incidence of stress among executives in the Indian organizations may not be high as compared to their counterparts in countries like Japan and United States of America. The Indian way of thinking has always been different from the Western mind. India, a www.ijmer.in
253
NTERNATIONAL J OURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
country with great heritage and spiritual background would overcome the most formidable .problems with a spiritualistic outlook. Indians have the inherent nature of passive acceptance of the consequences of dynamics of life which man has little control over. Then a time may come, when the West may start looking towards India for solace which the materialism has failed to provide, infact deprived them of it. Stress can be prevented through Indian system also, only when they would become a way of Life for majority of the executives in organizations of today. Reference: 1. Encyclopedia of Britannica 2. 2.40 BhagavadGitha 3. Quick and Quick 1979 4. Organisational Behavior:Stephen. P.Robbins. 5. Stress Management: CK Podder. Personnel today 6. Stress Management: SonitPottaHRM review 7. Strategic Management Stress for better management: jayabal. GISSN 0970- 8405 Jan- march 2004 vol XXIV NO: 7 8. N Shankar Stress and executive effectiveness: ISSN 0970-8405 July-Sept2002 volXXV No:2 NIPM 9. Yoga sutras (Astanga yoga) patanjali 10. Yoga-An instruction booklet, A Vivekanada Cendera Publications, 1977
www.ijmer.in
254
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
BABASAHEB DR.B.R.AMBEDKAR AND INSTITUTIONAL ESTABLISHMENT FOR SOCIAL, POLITICAL AND ECONOMIC RIGHTS Surya Raju Mattimalla* Ph.D. Research Scholar Dept. of History, Archaeology and Culture Dravidian University Kuppam-Andhra Pradesh State-India
Ambedka started many organization and established different institutions to achieve the objectives of his philosophy which in turn develops the personality and for the overall development of deprived classes in socio, political and economic spheres. In the process he started ‘Bahishkrit Hitkarini Sabha’, ‘Independent Labour Party’. ‘The All India Scheduled Caste Federation’,‘People Education Society’, ‘The Buddhist Society of India’ and ‘The Samta Sainik Dal’. The aims and objectives contributed enormously for the achievement of the rights for the depressed classes, minorities, workers and women. Bahishkrit Hitkarini Sabha (1924): The aims and objectives of the Sabha: 1. To promote the spread of education among the depressed classes by opening hostels or by employing such other means as may seem necessary or desirable. 2. To promote the spread of culture among the depressed classes by opening libraries, social centre’s and classes or study circles. 3. To advance and improve the economic condition of the depressed classes by starting industrial and agriculture schools. 4. To represent the grievances of the depressed classes.
www.ijmer.in
255
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
5. To organize or help any club, association or any movement calculated to bring about the general establishment, social rise or economic betterment of the depressed classes. Independent Labour Party (1936): The aims and objectives of the party: 1. To raise the efficiency and the productive capacity of the people and the party will Endeavour to undertake an extensive programme of technical education. 2. That party accepts the principle of state management and state ownership of industry whenever it may become necessary in the interest of the people. 3. The party will endeavor to remove all obstacles to free and full life and to alter, amend or abolish any economic system which is unjust to any class or section of the people. 4. The party will take legislations to protect agriculture tenants from the exaction and evictions by the landlords In general and in particular the tenants under the Kothi system and Talukdari system. 5. The party will endeavour to provide for the workers. Agricultural as well as industrial a minimum standard of living compatible with civilized life. 6. For the benefit of the industrial workers the party will endeavour to introduce legislation to control the employment, dismissal and promotion of employees in factories, to fix maximum hours of work, to make provision for the payment adequate wages, for leave with pay, and as many amenities of life as possible, and to provide payment to the worker of bonuses, pensions of other provisions on retirements from active work, on account of old age or other incapacity. The party also www.ijmer.in
256
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
introduces a scheme of social insurance which will provide the workers against sickness, unemployment and accident. The party will endeavour to provide cheap and sanitary dwellings for the workers. 7. For the benefit of the agricultural workers the party will endeavour to extent to them the same benefits which it proposes to secure for the industrial workers with such modifications as circumstances may require. 8. The party accepts the principles that it is the duty of the state of relieve unemployment, and the party will therefore endeavour to carry out this obligation by introducing schemes of land settlement and by starting public works to provide for the unemployed and the landless labourers. 9. The party will undertake legislation to protect the debtor class from undue exactions, usurious dealings and fraudulent transaction of the money-lenders and endeavour to tackle the problem of rural indebtedness. 10. The party will undertake legislation to afford adequate protection to the lower middle class in the matter of house rents, in industrial centers in big cities and towns. 11. The party will undertake legislation for the advancement of all necessary social reform to prevent social reforms from being out casted by the orthodox and to penalize all forms of organized attempts at direct action such as terrorism and boycott to prevent individuals or classes from exercising the rights and liberties given to them by law. 12. The party will undertake legislation for the advancement of all necessary social reform to prevent social reforms from being out casted by the orthodox and to penalize all forms of organized
www.ijmer.in
257
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
attempts at direct action such as terrorism and boycott to prevent individuals or classes from exercising the rights and liberties given to them by law. 13. The party will undertake legislation to deal with the problem of beggars and other destitute persons. 14. The party will endeavour to make village life cheerful by providing as many amentias of life as may be necessary for the objective in view. 15. The party will endeavour to improve village sanitation and housing by introducing a scheme of village planning somewhat on the lines of town-planning. 16. The party will endeavour to establish village liberties, village halls, village radius and rotary cinemas in order to modernize the outlook of the village and to make him a progressive person. 17. The party will give effect to the scheme of free and compulsory primary education. 18. The party will undertake a scheme of adult education so as to make all people literate. 19. The party will lay special emphasis on technical education. 20. The party will endeavour to provide facilities for higher education in India and aboard by mans of state aid to deserving persons from communities which are educationally backward. 21. The party will undertake legislation to reorganize the university education in the presidency by establishing regional universities and to make hem teaching universities. The party believes that this is the only remedy by which the course of examination which has blasted the intelligence and effort of the student population can be removed. www.ijmer.in
258
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
22. The party will endeavour to seen that the administration is good, efficient and free from corruption. 23. To secure the ends of good and efficient administration is good, efficient and free from corruption. 24. The party will also endeavour to prevent the from becoming the monopoly of any single caste Consistently with efficiency of administration endeavour to bring about a fair admixture of
administration or community. the party will all castes and
comm8unities in the administration of the presidency. The All India Scheduled Castes Federation (1942): The aims and objectives of the Federation: 1. To organize the Scheduled Castes of India, to educate them and to agitate for their social, economic and political freedom and to make them strive for their well being and advancement. 2. To secure for them equality of opportunity and thereby enable them to achieve equal status with their fellow citizens in all walks of life. 3. To secure for them equality of opportunity and thereby enable them to achieve equal status with their fellow citizens in all walks of life. 4. To engage itself in organizing the peasantry, landless labours and the workers in factories and other wage earners. 5. To undertake educational activities such as starting of schools and teaching them arts and crafts. 6. To keep a record of all cases of tyrannies and oppressions practiced upon the Scheduled Castes in different parts of the country.
www.ijmer.in
259
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
Peoples Education Society (1945): Aims and objectives of the Society: 1. To provide facilities for education, secondary. Collegiate, technical, physical etc. 2. To start, establish, conduct and or aid educational and Buddhist religious associations such as Schools, Colleges, vihars, Hotels, Libraries, Playgrounds, Buddhist Institutes etc. at suitable places in the state of Maharastra as well as any other parts in India. 3. To provide facilities for education of the poor and the Buddhists. 4. To create and foster general interests in education among the Scheduled Castes and the Buddhists who are converted from amongst the Scheduled Castes and in particular to give them special facilities, scholarships and free ships for higher education. 5. To promote science, Buddhist and other literature and fine arts and to impart useful knowledge in comparative studies of religion. 6. To purchase, take on lease or otherwise acquire property for the society and to invest and deal with the moneys of the society in such manner as may from time to time be determined. 7. To construct, maintain, rebuild, repair, alter, replace or reinstate houses, vihars, buildings or works for the purpose of the society. 8. To sell, dispose off improve, develop, exchange, lease, mortgage or otherwise alienate or deal withal or any property of the society.
www.ijmer.in
260
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
9. To co-operate or affiliate the society or any institution nor institutions run by or belonging to the society with a view to securing further advancements of the aims and objectives of the society especially of Buddhists. 10. To raise money with or without security for carrying out any of the purpose, aims, and objectives of the society. 11. To procure the society to be registered or recognized in any state in India. 12. To do all other lawful things and acts as are incidental or conducive to the attainment of any of the aforesaid aims and objects. The Buddhist Society of India (1955): The objectives of the society are: 1. To promote and spread Buddhism in India. 2. To establish temples for the Buddhist worships. 3. To establish schools and colleges for religious and scientific subjects. 4. To establish orphanages, hospitals and relief centres. 5. To start Buddhist seminaries for the preparation of worker for the spread of Buddhism. 6. To promote comparative study of all religions. 7. To undertake publications of Buddhist literature and to issue leaflets and pamphlets for giving a true understanding of the Buddhist religion to the common masses. 8. To create new order of priests, if it becomes necessary to do so.
www.ijmer.in
261
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
9. To hold gatherings and conferences of the Buddhist of India for common action and to establish fellowship. 10. To hold gatherings and conferences of the Buddhist of India for common action and to establish fellowship. The Republican Party of India (1956): The aims and objectives of the party: 1. It will treat all Indians not only as being equal before law but as being entitled to equality and will accordingly foster equality and will accordingly foster equality where it does not exist and uphold it where it is denied. 2. It will regard every Indians an end in himself with a right to his own development in his own way and the state as only a means to that end. 3. It will sustain the right of every Indian to freedom; religious economic and political subject to such limitations as may arise out of the need for the protection of the interests of other Indian or the state. 4. It will uphold the right of every Indian to equality of opportunity of opportunity subject to the provision that those who have had none in the past shell have priority over those who had. 5. It will keep the state ever aware of its obligation to make every India free from want and free from fear. 6. It will insist on the maintenance of liberty, equality and fraternity and will strive for redemption from oppression and exploitation of many by man, of class by class and of nation by nation.
www.ijmer.in
262
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
7. It will stand for the parliament system of government both in the interest of public and in the interest of the individual. All India Scheduled Castes Students Federation: Aims and Objectives: 1. Organize the Scheduled Castes Students of India into a compact body. 2. Development corporate life amongst them and to discard all activities and undertakings that accentuate caste consciousness among them. 3. Safeguard the interest of the Scheduled Caste Students of India. 4. Crete a cultural atmosphere amongst them by encouraging moral and intellectual education and by bringing them in touch with the cultural and political movement of the present day. 5. Encourage physical cultural in order to improve the health and physique of the Scheduled Castes Students. 6. Safe-guard the interest of the Scheduled Castes people. 7. Co-ordinate the activities of the Scheduled Castes students for the welfare of the Scheduled Castes people and the country. 8. Formulate public opinion in favour of the Scheduled Castes movement. 9. Undertake all such matters, subject to the general sphere of the life of the Scheduled Castes students. The Samaj Samatha Sangh (September 1927) The Samta Sainik Dal (December 1927) Aims and Objectives of the Sainik Dal:
www.ijmer.in
263
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
1. The aim of the Samta Sainik Dal is to strive for the removal of all inequality based on race, religion, caste, sex or class to until members of the Scheduled Castes communities for a struggle to build a society based on the freedom and equality of all. a. The Samatha Sainik Dal shells unites and organize the Scheduled Castes youths under its banner. b. The Samatha Sainik Dal Shall promote all social cultural and other activities among the Scheduled Castes particularly among the youth so as to cultivate self-respect, self-reliance and a spirit of self-sacrifice in their minds. c. The Samata Sainik Dal shall co-operate, with all such organization and movements that help to further its aims and objectives. Ambedkar realized the importance of the press in getting the problems of depressed castes into limelight as the press is not favored to their rights. He started a weekly and fortnight journal to get the grievances of these classes into limelight.
Bahishkrit Bharat: A fortnightly Journal was started on 3rd April 1927.
Janatha:
A
fortnightly
turned
to
weekly
started
on
24theNovember 1930.
Prabudh Bharat: Janata was later published as Prabudh Bharat from 4th February 1956.
Different Educational Institutions: Ambedkar made a concrete intervention for the education of the Scheduled Castes from 1945. It was his continuous concern and to fulfill it he founded different educational Institutions.
www.ijmer.in
264
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR - 2.972; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 8(1), AUGUST 2015
People Education Society: He founded this institution in Bombay in the year 1945.
Siddharth College of Arts and Science: Started in 1946 in Bombay.
Siddharth Night School: Started in the year 1947.
Milind Mahavidyalaya: Started in 1950.
Siddharth College of Commerce and Economics: Started in the year 1953.
Milind Multipurpose High School: Started in the year 1955.
Siddharth College of Law: started in the year 1956.
----------------------------------------------------------* I am deeply acknowledging my gratitude towards my Ph.D. Supervisor Dr. D. Mercy Ratna Rani for encouraging my research work and my strong gratitude’s towards my beloved Christian parents Mattimalla Suguna Yadav& Mattimalla Anand alias Titus and my sister Mekala Vijaya & her husband Mekala Mani Kumar and their two kids Ravi Verma & Mani Verma along with my Christian philanthropists French Father Dominique; Belgium Sister Mary Veronica; and Madam Josvin Mary Navitha Kumar, A Tamil Nadar Christian; and Madam Srimathi K.Padma gaaru and her husband Shri K Prabhu Das gaaru from the University of Hyderabad, Hyderabad, Telangana State for encouraging me academically and intellectually to grow up and helped me financially to study and to attend various conferences and seminars in India and abroad. I never forget the philanthropic help of Smt. Padma madam gaaru and her husband Sri.K.Prabhu Das gaaru for the unconditional support towards my intellectual pursuits.I am deeply acknowledging Prof. Livio Sansone, A Christian white Professor with a kind heart for Dalits from Brazil, who invited me for International Graduate Course in History, Heritage and Memory to study at the Federal University of Bahia in Brazil; And Madam Josvin Mary Navitha Kumar, a Nadar converted Christian from Tamil Nadu. She had helped me financially to do my Human Rights and Democratisation (Asia-Pacific) Course from the world-class University of Sydney, Australia. I am also indebted to mainstream Anti-Caste Social Scientists Eleanor Zelliot,Gail Omvedt, Christophe Jaffrelot, Perry Anderson, Benedict Anderson, Gopal Guru, Aloysius, Sharmila Rege, Kanche Ilaiah, Upendra Bakshi, Sambaiah Gundimeda, Prof.N.Kanakaratnam, Professor Anand Teltumbde-Grand-Son of Dr B R Ambedkar and my good friend from the United States of America, Claudia for her unconditional love towards India’s Dalits etc for their veracious writings in order to bring social justice to the most oppressed groups in the world i.e DALITS
www.ijmer.in
265
